JP7670592B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, are equipped with movable bodies that can be operated, and can perform movable body effects by moving the movable bodies while variable display of patterns is being performed.

Some gaming machines of this type are capable of executing an initial action (long initial action) that causes the movable body to move in the same way as the performance action when the power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, or an initial action (short initial action) that causes the movable body to move with some of the performance action omitted (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Also, some machines are capable of variably displaying multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative patterns) in response to the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2015-113217 A JP 2017-86392 A

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A movable body that can move from an initial position to a performance position ;
A performance execution means;
A performance control means;
A movable body control means,
The game control means executes a variable display of the specific identification information,
the performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information;
In one rendering mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed;
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control for operating the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect for encouraging a player to perform an action during a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action promotion performance is notified.
The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a computer-implemented ...
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
When a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of variable display before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and when the movable body is in the initial position , and power is then turned on, it is possible to control the movable body so that the confirmation operation control is performed with the second operation control pattern during execution of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the confirmation operation control is ended before the start of the second part,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display when the power is turned on,
The game control means is capable of performing specific identification information light emission control, which is a control of a plurality of light emitting means that show the result of the variable display of the specific identification information, when the power is turned on;
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be started after the display of the boot preparation display is started,
The confirmation operation control may be started after the specific identification information light emission control is started.
It is characterized by:

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display result designation command, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a game state background designation command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special pattern), (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table (for the second special pattern), and (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table. An explanatory diagram of types of jackpots. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing during small win release. A flowchart showing an example of a small hit end processing. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial operation control process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an origin placement control process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a switching control table. 11 is an explanatory diagram of control during an execution period of confirmation control and control during an execution period of post-confirmation operation control. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 1A shows a state in which the movable body on the board is located at the origin position, and FIG. FIG. 1A shows a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. FIG. 1A shows a state in which the frame-mounted movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows a state in which they are located at the performance position. A diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the performance control CPU. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the effects that can be executed during the variable display period of the SP reach, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed during a jackpot gaming state. A diagram showing an example of the operation of the pre-reading movable object announcement. A diagram showing an example of the start time notice operation. A diagram showing an example of the operation of movable object preview and pseudo consecutive preview. A figure showing an example of reach notice/button notice operation. A figure showing an example of the operation of SP reach notice. A diagram showing an example of the operation of a jackpot presentation. A figure showing an example of the operation of a jackpot performance (promotion performance). FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of state transition operation control. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. FIG. 1A is a diagram for explaining the operation of a movable body, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the state of lights and sounds according to the operation of the movable body. 13A to 13J are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. This is a timing chart for when movable body preview is performed after initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a start-up win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a start-up win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for when movable body preview is performed after initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice after initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting the look-ahead movable body notice during initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation, and a variable 2 display that executes a movable object preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs after an initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart showing a case where the movable body moves to the performance position as an initial operation, and a case where the movable body does not move to the performance position as an initial operation. As a performance action of the moving object notice, the moving object may move to the performance position, or as a performance action of the moving object notice, the moving object may move to the performance position. This is a timing chart for a movable body preview when the movable body stops halfway from the origin position to the performance position as an initial operation. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation due to a cold start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart of a demonstration performance when a movable body stops halfway from the origin position to the performance position during initial operation. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a jackpot fluctuation. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare performance. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when operation confirmation control is executed for a fanfare performance. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A figure showing an example of the operation of operation confirmation control as a modified example when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round of play in which a promotion effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being subsequently turned on. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-consecutive announcement is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power interruption occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being subsequently turned on. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on subsequently. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being subsequently turned on. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an aspect of an initial operation due to a cold start. 1 is a timing chart showing an initial operation based on a cold start, and a timing chart showing an initial operation based on a hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between an initialization notification image and an operation confirmation control. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between an initialization notification image and an operation confirmation control. 13A to 13D are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing examples of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when an error occurs in the operation confirmation control. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine in embodiment 1. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. A diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) are the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) are the fourth presentation mode. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative patterns in the first presentation mode, and in the second presentation mode, respectively. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the third presentation mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the fourth presentation mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the manner of variable display of the decorative pattern and the small pattern. 1A shows the decorative pattern change start action, (B) shows the change stop action, and (C) shows the loop action. FIG. 1A is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns with periods of lamp light emission control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of a lamp. 11A to 11B are diagrams illustrating examples of the operation of the hold display. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 139. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the second presentation mode. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 141. A figure showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in Figure 141. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as modified example 1. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 144. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative pattern appears. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). This figure shows the flow of the stopping display of decorative patterns following Figure 149. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopping display of decorative patterns when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode). 1A is a diagram showing a first background image, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and FIG. 1C is a diagram explaining a background change. A diagram showing the flow of background changes in the first presentation mode. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first presentation mode. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second presentation mode. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third presentation mode and the fourth presentation mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, (B) is the second presentation mode, and (C) is the third and fourth presentation modes. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. A diagram showing an example of operation when a start winning occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. A diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive announcements. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-consecutive number display and a pattern color, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the types of pseudo-consecutive number display and a pattern color, and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing a pseudo-consecutive number display color determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the flow of reach presentation. A diagram showing the flow of reach presentation continuing from Figure 163. A diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in a reach performance. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation. A diagram showing the flow of the SP reach presentation following Figure 166. A diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach performance. 1A to 1C are diagrams showing a second modified example of the present invention. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a third modified example of the present invention.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic portion 132SG form)
[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a movable body performance using the movable body during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a part in which a movable body announcement in which the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down can be executed),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, a portion where an effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the movement of the on-board movable body 32A),
The sound output means can output a movable body performance sound corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, in the movable body preview shown in FIG. 49, the part where performance sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position).
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed at the time of power-on accompanied by initialization, when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the output of the performance movable control and the movable body performance sound is limited, while the display of the effect display is performed, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, at least the performance movable control and the display of the effect display are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 are activated). When a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of 01, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of a movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L, 8R are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 61, after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up winning occurs, and when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started based on the start-up winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the effect display 132SG407 are displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction.
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the specified period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed when the power is turned on without initialization, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output, and when the movable body performance is executed after the specified period, the performance movable control, the effect display is displayed, and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, during the initial operation period of these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, When a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 and a movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 65, after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start winning occurs, and when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the output of a movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction are performed during the execution period of the movable body prediction.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed with a variable display started during confirmation movable control, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate to the player that a movable body presentation has been executed by outputting an effect display or a movable body presentation sound, while preventing the presentation movable control from interfering with the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is,
The expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the movable body performance is executed than when it is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, the portion where the expectation of a jackpot is set higher when the movable body forecast is executed than when the movable body forecast is not executed),
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that was started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period, the performance movable control and the output of the movable body performance sound are restricted, and after the specified period ends, the performance movable control restricted to the specified period is performed, while the movable body performance sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, In addition, when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of the movable body prediction sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body prediction are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again, but the output of the movable body prediction sound in response to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R is not executed.
When the power is turned on without initialization, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period, the performance movable control is restricted, and after the specified period ends, the performance movable control restricted during the specified period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, When a start winning occurs, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the presentation effect is not reduced due to the presentation movable control remaining restricted in a movable body presentation that has a high expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is,
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means, when powered on, is capable of performing the confirmation movement control to move the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body operate normally (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 ),
The confirmation movement control ends based on the completion of the movement of the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the initial movements of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are the parts that end last when the initial movement of the below-board movable body 32B is completed).
The movable body performance is a performance using the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the movable body notice is a performance that operates the on-board movable body 32A),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the specified period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the performance movement control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period, and the performance movement control restricted during the specified period is executed when the movement of the second movable body by the confirmation movement control is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame-up movable body 631B, the frame-up movable body 631C, the frame-up movable body 631D, the frame-up movable body 631E, the frame-up movable body 631F, the frame-up movable body 631G, the frame-up movable body 631H ... When a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the movable body 132SG101, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again after the initial operation of the under-board movable body 32B is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which performance movement control is executed using the first movable body when the movement of the first movable body by the confirmation movement control is completed, thereby preventing the confirmation movement control from becoming indistinguishable from the performance movement control.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is,
The presentation control means is capable of executing an initialization notification corresponding to the initialization when power is turned on with initialization (for example, as shown in Figs. 61 and 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the presentation control means causes the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and outputs an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the confirmation movable control overlaps with the execution period of the initialization notification (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the period during which the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the upper-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the period during which the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R are longer than the initial operation periods of the upper-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101).
After the execution period of the confirmation movable control ends, when the movable body performance is executed with the variable display started during the execution period of the initialization notification, when the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of the initialization notification, the performance movable control and the display of the effect display are performed, while the output of the movable body performance sound is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, even if the variable display that executes the movable body announcement is started during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, if the execution period of the movable body announcement is after the end of the operation of each movable body, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 are executed during the execution period of the movable body announcement, but the light emission in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even during the execution period of the initialization response notification, if the confirmation movement control has ended, the performance movement control is executed, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not reduce the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is
The performance control means is capable of executing a pre-reading movable body performance that suggests that the movable body performance will be executed in a variable display prior to a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern in which the movable body performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading movable body notice),
The movable body control means is capable of performing specific performance movement control to move the movable body by a specific action when the pre-reading movable body performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, the performance control CPU 120 controls the on-board movable body 32A to move up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position as a pre-reading movable body notice),
The execution period of the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body performance is executed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the special chart change time of the non-reach miss variable display is 12 seconds or less, and the period of the initial operation is 30 seconds),
When the power is turned on, if the start condition is satisfied multiple times during the specified period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and the pre-reading movable body performance is executed in a variable display that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition, when the pre-reading movable body performance is executed during the specified period, the specific movable control is restricted,
When the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body performance is executed during the specified period ends, the specific movable control limited to the specified period is not executed after the specified period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, and the execution of the pre-reading movable body announcement is decided due to the occurrence of multiple variable displays during the confirmation operation of each movable body as the initial operation control, if the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement overlaps with the confirmation operation period of each movable body or the period of the initial operation control, the display of the effect display 132SG407 is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement, and the presentation operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the pre-reading movable body announcement is not executed again after the variable display ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display is crossed, the restricted specific movable control is not executed during the confirmation movable control, so that a gaming machine can be provided that does not confuse the player by excessively moving the movable body after the confirmation movable control ends.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing, in one variable display, as the movable body presentation, a first movable body presentation (e.g., the first movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69 ) and a second movable body presentation (e.g., the second movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69 ) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body presentation,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, a first performance movement control (for example, a part in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) can be performed to move the movable body by a first predetermined operation.
When the second movable body performance is executed, a second performance movement control (for example, a part in which the board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) can be performed to move the movable body by a second predetermined operation.
When the power is turned on, in the case where the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in one variable display started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is restricted, and after the end of the predetermined period, the first performance movable control restricted during the predetermined period is executed,
If the second movable body performance is executed before the restricted first performance movable control is performed, the first performance movable control is not performed and the second performance movable control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 69, if the initial operation of the movable body has already been performed during the execution period of the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is executed after the initial operation of the movable body is completed, but if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview has already been executed before the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is not executed and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview is continued).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of a movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of a movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-7 is
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, a portion in which the above-board movable body 32A is provided with an above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with a below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g).
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the second movable body by a special operation for notifying that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a deciding performance in which the under-board movable body 32B is raised),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the underboard movable body 32B is in an initial operation).
It is possible to perform special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E5), the performance control CPU 120 controls the underboard movable body 9e to emit a predetermined light color (for example, a portion that emits light in a rainbow flash as shown in FIG. 56 (B9)) when the underboard movable body 32B rises).
When the special performance movable control is executed during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is limited (for example, when the execution period of the deciding performance is entered during the initial operation of each movable body after a hot start, the part that limits the light emission (rainbow flash) of the under-board movable body LED9e in a mode corresponding to the deciding performance during the execution period of the deciding performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is
The operation mode of the second movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the second movable body by the special performance movement control are common (for example, the initial operation and the performance operation of the under-board movable body 32B are both operations between the origin position and the performance position),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B) and FIG. 61, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body LED 9e to emit light in an initial highlight mode (flashing red)).
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the special effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B) , the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body LED 9e to flash in rainbows when the underboard movable body 32B advances, and causes the underboard movable body LED 9e to emit light in a smooth rainbow when the underboard movable body 32B moves in a contrasting manner).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movable control or special movable control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-9 is
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-board movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means can move the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 operates the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then operates the below-board movable body 32B as shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 ).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the underboard movable body 32B is in an initial operation),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, during the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the on-board movable body LED 9d is caused to emit light in an initial highlighting mode and the below-board movable body LED 9e is caused to emit light in an initialization notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 1-10 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position);
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not located at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin placement control process shown in FIG. 30 ).
When the variable display is started, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427 from the timing when the variable display is started).
When the power is turned on, if the variable display is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the return control is restricted (for example, if a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and the variable display based on the start winning is started, the initial operation of each movable body is executed with priority over the operation of each movable body to its origin position).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position);
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not located at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin placement control process shown in FIG. 30 ).
When the variable display ends and the game is in a standby state, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427 from the start timing of the customer waiting demo performance).
When the power is turned on, if the variable display is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and the variable display ends during the predetermined period and the game is put into the game standby state, the return control is restricted (for example, if a customer waiting demo performance is started in response to the end of the variable display, a portion that prioritizes the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body over the operation of each movable body to the origin position);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-12 is
The performance control means is capable of executing the movable body performance a plurality of times during one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, a portion in which a first variable display notice and a second variable display notice are executed during one variable display),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that was started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the variable display is executed during the initial operation of each movable body, if a first movable body announcement is executed during the initial operation, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed).
When one of the movable body performances executed multiple times in one variable display is executed, and the movement of the movable body by the performance movement control corresponding to the one movable body performance does not end normally, when the next movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control corresponding to the next movable body performance is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 71, even if the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, when the execution period of the second movable body preview is reached, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that, even if the performance movable control corresponding to one movable body performance does not end normally, allows for a retry by the performance movable control corresponding to the next movable body performance.

The gaming machine of form 1-13 is
The performance control means is capable of executing, as the movable body performance, a first movable body performance (e.g., a first movable body announcement) and a second movable body performance (e.g., a second movable body announcement) which is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a first performance movement control that moves the movable body by a first predetermined operation (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a first movable body notice),
When the second movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a second performance movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined operation (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a second movable body notice),
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in a variable display that is started during a specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the specified period, the first performance movable control is restricted, and after the specified period ends, the first performance movable control restricted during the specified period is executed (for example, when the execution period of the first movable body announcement occurs during the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed during the execution period of the first movable body announcement, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is executed again after the initial operation of each movable body).
In the case where the first movable body is moving due to the limited first performance movement control, when the second movable body performance is executed, the first performance movement control is interrupted and the second performance movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the execution period of the second movable body announcement occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement in the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of a movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of a movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-14 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position);
A first detection means (e.g., origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is placed at an initial position;
Further comprising a second detection means (e.g., performance position sensor 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is disposed in the advanced position;
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body toward the advanced position over a first period based on the detection by the first detection means that the movable body is placed at the initial position, and for moving the movable body toward the initial position when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body is placed at the advanced position during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that moves the movable body toward the origin position when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the first period).
The performance movement control is a control for moving the movable body toward the advanced position over a second period, and stopping the movable body when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advanced position during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that stops the operation of the movable body when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the second period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed during play, even if the movement of the movable body corresponding to the movable body presentation is not performed normally, the movement of the movable body based on the confirmation movement control is not performed, so a gaming machine can be provided that can reduce the decrease in the presentation effect of a movable body presentation that was not executed normally.

The gaming machine of form 1-15 is
The movable body control means
If the movable body cannot operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly executes the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control for moving the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)).
In the case where the error movement control is performed, when the movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, in the movable body performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the sound output corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The performance control means is capable of performing demo display control for displaying a demonstration display on the display means when the power is turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 76, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 displays a customer waiting demo performance on the image display device 5).
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control is terminated before the demo display control is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 76 to 78, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started after a power outage, the customer waiting demo performance is displayed after the initial operation control of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered by movable bodies operated by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movable control for a predetermined period of time (for example, the performance control CPU 120 requires 30 seconds for the initial operation of each movable body),
The performance control means is capable of performing the demo display control after a period of at least the same length as the predetermined period has elapsed since the confirmation movement control was ended (for example, a part in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed 30 seconds after the initial operation of each movable body is ended),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered by displaying the demonstration display immediately after confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 2-3 is,
The performance control means can perform the demo display control at different timings depending on whether the power is turned on with initialization or not (for example, the period from the end of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started up by a cold start or a hot start).
The movable body control means
The confirmation movement control can be performed in common when power is turned on with initialization and when power is supplied without initialization (for example, the period from the end of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed is different when the pachinko game machine 1 is started up by a cold start and when it is started up by a hot start).
When power is turned on with initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is terminated before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means;
When power is turned on without initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is terminated before the demo display control is performed by the performance control means (for example, even if the period from the end of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs between when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the initial operation of each movable body is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered by the movable body operating by the confirmation movable control, whether the power is turned on with initialization or without initialization.

The gaming machine of form 2-4 is,
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
and an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, a portion in which the above-board movable body 32A is provided with an above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with a below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light amount adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, and the light amount (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the underboard movable body 32B is in an initial operation),
When the operation means is operated during the specific light emission control, at least the light emitting means emitting light by the specific light emission control is restricted so that the brightness is not based on the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B) , when the initial operation of each movable body is performed, the light amount (brightness) of each lamp 9a to 9g cannot be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movement control is not changed, so that a gaming machine can be provided in which there is no hindrance to confirming the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 2-5 is,
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
and an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, a portion in which the above-board movable body 32A is provided with an above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with a below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light amount adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, and the light amount (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The performance control means is capable of displaying a changeable display suggesting that the luminance of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, a portion in the image display device 5 where a menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed),
The display of the changeable display is restricted during the specified period, and the display of the changeable display is performed after the specified period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, during the initial operation of each movable body, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is not displayed on the image display device 5, and during the initial operation of each movable body, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a changeable display during confirmation movable control, a gaming machine can be provided in which attention to the confirmation movable control is not lost.

The gaming machine of form 2-6 is,
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the performance control CPU 120 moves the board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then moves the board movable body 32B).
The light emission control means is capable of performing specific light emission control for causing the light emission means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the underboard movable body 32B is in an initial operation).
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control by the light emission control means is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A is performed, the below-board movable body LED 9e is not illuminated in the initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 2-7 is,
The performance control means includes:
A movable body performance using the movable body can be executed during the demonstration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, a part capable of executing a performance in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the performance position during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, a portion where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5),
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a demo-in-motion control that moves the movable body in a common motion manner with the motion manner of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation motion control (for example, a portion in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved from the origin position toward the performance position, and then the on-board movable body 32A is moved from the performance position to the origin position).
If the movable body cannot operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly executes the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control for moving the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)).
In the case where the error movement control is performed, when the demonstration display is displayed, the movement control during the demonstration is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the customer waiting demo performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 in the image display device 5, and the illumination in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the demonstration display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled to play the round during the advantageous state,
The fanfare performance is as follows:
An introduction part (for example, an introduction part. See FIG. 52 (F2) to (F6)) that notifies the user of the advantageous state;
A launch direction notification part (for example, a right-hit notification part; see FIG. 52 (F7) to (F8)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the player of the launch direction of the game medium;
It is composed of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the launch direction notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare performance (right hit notification part) involving the operation of the on-board movable body 32A starts. See FIG. 80).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare performance is not hindered by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is,
There are several types of advantageous states (for example, big wins A to E),
In the introduction part, it is possible to notify which of the multiple types of advantageous states is the advantageous state, and as the notification, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (e.g., jackpot type display 132SG421) corresponding to the advantageous state being controlled, and to display an introduction display before the advantageous state name display (e.g., introduction display before the jackpot type display 132SG422) before the advantageous state name display is displayed,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to end an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the advantageous state name display is displayed (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the part in which the initial operation ends before the big win type display 132SG421 is displayed in FIG. 52 (F6)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to know which advantageous state the game will be controlled to, even if confirmation movable control is performed during a fanfare presentation.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance, by using specific light emission control and fanfare light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 3-4 is,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is executed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control is caused to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, when the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light emission control means causes the light emission means of the first movable body to emit light by the specific light emission control, while causing the light emission means of the second movable body to emit light by the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moved, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare presentation.

The gaming machine of form 3-5 is,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the fanfare performance is executed, light emission control may be performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light at a first luminance in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed, it is possible to perform light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light at a second luminance in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first luminance in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance, during the operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second luminance (low luminance) lower than the first luminance (high luminance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 3-6 is
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
the movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlighting mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 3-7 is,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control for moving the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the special effect movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation emits light in a common initial highlight mode (white lighting) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position, while the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the performance operation control can emit light in different light emission modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movable control or special movable control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-8 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the launch direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movable control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movable control when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movable control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the launch direction notification part when the movable body is moved by the special effect movable control (for example, in the movable body performance, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the right hit notification part which is different from the initial highlight mode (white lighting) and the sound output is limited when the movable body moves by the initial operation, and in the movable body performance executed in the right hit notification part, a sound corresponding to the right hit notification part is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-9 is
Further comprising a display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
The performance control means includes:
In the launch direction notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 52 (F7)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movement control to move the movable body by a special action,
If the confirmation movement control is not normally completed within a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control is performed again.
When the confirmation movement control is performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special performance movement control is restricted while the effect display is displayed (for example, when executing a movable body performance in the right hit notification part in a fanfare performance, it is possible to operate the movable body by a special action and display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance, and if the action confirmation control cannot be normally completed over a specific period, it is possible to determine that an action error has occurred and perform the action confirmation control again, and when the action confirmation control is performed over a specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special action is restricted while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can show the player that a movable body performance has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special performance movable control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled to play the round during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control ends before the end of the execution period of the fanfare performance (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, the operation confirmation control ends before the round performance corresponding to the round game starts. See FIG. 81).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the power consumption when the power is turned on is reduced to reduce the load on the gaming machine, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.Furthermore, when the power is cut off simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated within the execution period of the fanfare performance, thereby providing a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy an advantageous state without having to worry about the movable body operating due to the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., recovery display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power failure occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on.
the light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery for causing the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 4-3 is,
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves due to the performance movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 4-4 is,
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance.
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the fanfare light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 4-5 is,
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance;
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music during a big win)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a fanfare performance was in progress before the power was cut off.

The gaming machine of form 4-6 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the performance movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the performance operation control (for example, the win/lose button performance), they emit light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled to play the round during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control is ended before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to end the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 82).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movable body from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off just before the fanfare performance ends, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on ends before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare presentation has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, consecutive win number/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see Figures 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is as follows:
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a round of play after the fanfare presentation has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompting display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball count display 132SG452, ball count display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on after that, it is possible to perform a round-time light emission control in which the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is caused to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to a round of play by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during the big win. See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that, through specific light emission control, can draw attention to a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during a round of play.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is as follows:
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a round-time light emission control in which the light-emitting means of the movable body emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play.
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emitting control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the round light emitting control (for example, when the first movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during a round of play.

The gaming machine of form 5-6 is,
The light emission control means
In a round of play after the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light by the light emission control during the round.
The light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, has a lower brightness than the light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare performance (for example, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to a music piece during a jackpot (round performance) in a round game in which a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the pachinko game machine 1 does not start up with a hot start may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to a music piece during a jackpot (round performance)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 5-7 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the performance movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the performance operation control (for example, the win/lose button performance), they emit light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs at the same time as the easy-entry state is entered and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control is ended before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to end the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 85).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movable body from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off as soon as the variable means enters an easy-to-enter state, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power interruption occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on;
the light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery for causing the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power interruption occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, a portion capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is,
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means enters the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, over a period from when the variable means is controlled from the easy-entry state to when the game medium is not allowed to enter,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display. See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that can be moved by confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 6-4 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period of time, it is possible to perform a round-time light emission control in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emission control during the recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the round (for example, during the power outage recovery, a part that may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 6-5 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during control of the variable means to set the variable means to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is in the easy-entry state for a specified period of time, it is possible to perform a round-time light emission control in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round performance (music during the jackpot). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on, even if a round of play was in progress before the power outage.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the easy-entry state in one round of play ends and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the easy-entry state in the next round of play ends (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period of the large prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play ends (see FIG. 52 (F10)). See FIG. 86).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movement of the movable body from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the confirmation movement control in the case where the power is cut off just before the end of one round of play and the power is turned on is terminated before the end of the next round of play, allowing the player to continue playing a round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare presentation has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, consecutive win number/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see Figures 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 7-3 is as follows:
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a next round of play that is started when the one round of play is ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 7-4 is as follows:
When a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state of the variable means in one round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the variable means in one round of play to be in the impossible-entry state, and then moves the movable body through the confirmation movement control (see FIG. 86 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 7-5 is as follows:
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the performance movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the performance operation control (for example, the win/lose button performance), they emit light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) is performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally;
When informing the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a winning/losing button performance or a promotion performance) is performed to move the movable body by an action for informing the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs at the same time as the control is made to the no-entry state in one round of play and then the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the no-entry state ends (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F29)). See FIG. 87).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movable body from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the confirmation movement control in the case where the variable means becomes unable to enter during one round of play and the power is cut off at the same time and the power is turned on is terminated before the next round of play ends, allowing the player to continue playing a round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and the power is then turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery for causing the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power interruption occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state and the power is then turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the variable means being controlled to an inaccessible state and the power is then turned on (for example, a portion capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the large prize opening being controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 8-3 is
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is provided,
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and when the power is subsequently turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display during the period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play;
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display. See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that can be moved by confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 8-4 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means includes:
In the case where the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state during one round of play and a power outage occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform interval light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance during the execution period of the interval performance,
When a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to a display during recovery over a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the interval (for example, during power outage recovery, a part that may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 8-5 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means includes:
In the one round of play, when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state and a power outage occurs at the same time, and when the power is turned on after the power outage occurs, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform interval light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance during the execution period of the interval performance,
When a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to a recovery display during the period from the end of the one round of play to the start of the next round of play;
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the interval performance (music during a big win)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 8-6 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to end an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the result notification part is started.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval presentation is not hindered by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-7 is
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movable control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movable control when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body performance when the movable body is moved by the special performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance using the under-board movable body 32B can be executed as a promotion performance in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and when the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance operation control in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B that operates by the operation confirmation control, and a part in which sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates by the operation confirmation control, and a sound corresponding to the movable body performance is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 8-8 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means includes:
In the result notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 53 (F24)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control is not normally completed within a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control is performed again.
When a power outage occurs immediately before the control to the inaccessible state is performed in the one round game in which the interval performance is performed, and the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
When the movable body performance is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special performance movement control is restricted while the effect display is displayed (for example, when the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the operation confirmation control again, and when a power outage occurs just before the large prize winning port is controlled to a closed state in one round game in which the interval performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and when the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance is restricted while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can show the player that a movable body performance has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special performance movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-9 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the performance movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, an advance operation period) in the performance operation control (for example, in the case of successful promotion of the promotion performance), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, a retreat operation period). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Mode 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The presentation control means is capable of executing a notification presentation (e.g., a promotion presentation) for notifying a player of which advantageous state the player is in during a specific round of play in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state;
The notification performance is
An introduction part (see, for example, FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see, for example, (F24) to (F29) of FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
When the first advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the first advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
When the second advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round game and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round game starts. See FIG. 89).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification performance is not hindered by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a prescribed period after the fanfare presentation has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, consecutive win number/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see Figures 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the specific round of play, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area;
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 9-4 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the notification performance is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the notification performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during a notification performance by using specific light-emitting control and notification light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-5 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification performance;
The light emission control means causes the light emission means of the movable body to emit light by the specific light emission control when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moved by the movement confirmation control, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) instead of a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-6 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
In the specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, a rainbow light emission mode) corresponding to the notification performance,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light by the notification light emission control.
The notification light emission control performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on has a lower brightness than the notification light emission control performed when no power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play (for example, during the second round interval period or the third round of play, the operation confirmation control is started, and the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but the portions that are illuminated at a lower brightness than when illuminated in the performance operation control (promotion performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-7 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing a motion promotion presentation for encouraging a player to perform a motion during the execution period of the notification presentation (see FIG. 53 (F23)),
The action prompting performance is executed in the introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)),
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the introduction part starts (for example, the operation prompting part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, that is, the part where the initial operation of the movable body ends before the operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B starts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the action promotion presentation in the introduction part is not hindered by the movable body that operates according to the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-8 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movable control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movable control when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body performance when the movable body is moved by the special performance movement control (for example, when performing an initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting mode; white lighting), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited, and when performing a performance in a promotion performance, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode, etc.), while a sound effect in a manner corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-9 is
The performance control means includes:
In the result notification part, a movable body performance using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control is not normally completed within a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control is performed again.
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game, and the confirmation movement control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
When the movable body performance is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special performance movement control is restricted while the effect display is displayed (for example, when the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the operation confirmation control again, and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round performance in which the promotion performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and when the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance is restricted while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can show the player that a movable body performance has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special performance movable control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, is capable of performing a round game multiple times by setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The presentation control means can execute an ending presentation after the final round of play is completed (see FIG. 52 (F12) to (F14)).
The ending performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Fig. 52 (F12) and Fig. 53 (F31)),
A special state notification part (for example, a time-saving state notification part; see FIG. 52 (F13), FIG. 53 (F32), (F34)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies about a special state controlled after the advantageous state;
It is composed of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movable control ends before the special state notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the 10th final round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see FIG. 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information on the time-saving state is notified starts in the ending period. See FIG. 90).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the special state notification part in the ending performance is not hindered by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, an ending light emission control can be performed in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control is made to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during an ending performance by using specific light-emitting control and ending light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 10-3 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance;
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, when the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light-emitting control means causes the light-emitting means of the first movable body to emit light by the specific light-emitting control, while the light-emitting means of the second movable body to emit light by the ending light-emitting control (for example, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-under movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body performing the initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during an ending presentation.

The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the ending performance is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the ending light emission control.
The ending light emission control performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on has a lower brightness than the ending light emission control performed when no power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the ending performance (for example, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g that perform the initial operation are illuminated at a low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) instead of a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, is capable of performing a round game multiple times by setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing an ending effect after a final round of play is completed,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the execution period of the ending performance (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see FIG. 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information on the time-saving state is notified starts in the ending period. See FIG. 91).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that reduces the load on the gaming machine by reducing power consumption when the power is turned on, cuts off the power at the same time as the ending performance is executed, and terminates the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on within the execution period of the ending performance (allowing the player to enjoy the high base state without worrying about the moving body operated by the confirmation movement control).

The gaming machine of form 11-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on, and when a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
the light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery for causing the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in a case where a power failure occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on, and in a case where a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on (for example, a portion capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the large prize opening being controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 11-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display. See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that can be moved by confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 11-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance during the execution period of the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance;
The light emission control during the recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the ending light emission control (for example, during the power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 11-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance during the execution period of the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance;
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance (for example, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the ending performance (ending introduction). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on, even if an ending presentation was in progress before the power failure.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The specific identification information includes first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
the normal state is a state in which the variable display of the first identification information is easily performed,
the special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is easily performed,
During the special state, information regarding the advantageous state (e.g., consecutive number of times/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) can be displayed in the first display area of the display means;
During the special state, the second display area of the display means can display hold information (e.g., a second hold memory number or a second hold display 132SG002) related to the variable display of the second identification information,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the first display area with respect to the second display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when the power is started by hot start after a power outage occurs during time reduction and then restored, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display related to the jackpot (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454). See FIG. 92).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as that of the first display area.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is
The information relating to the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while the reserved information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (for example, the consecutive number of times/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, while the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 are parts whose display mode can change even during the time-saving state due to changes in the number of winnings or pre-reading notices, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of pending information, which may change due to a movable body operated by confirmation movable control, is not hindered as much as information regarding an advantageous state, which does not change.

The gaming machine of form 12-3 is
The range in which the movable body movable by the confirmation movable control overlaps with the first display area is larger than the range in which the movable body movable by the confirmation movable control overlaps with the second display area (for example, the range in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with the display area of the consecutive number of wins/total number of balls displayed 132SG454 by the initial operation is larger than the range in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with the display area 5SL of the second reserved memory number and the second reserved display area 132SG012 of the second reserved display 132SG002 by the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as that of the first display area.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect for encouraging a player to perform an action during a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part (for example, the period from (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 50) until the action promotion performance is executed;
A second part (for example, a result notification part of FIG. 50 (D6) and (D7)) that is executed after the first part and notifies the result of the action promotion performance;
The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a computer-implemented ...
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific variable display and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the second part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the button notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 94).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the action promotion presentation is not obstructed by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning performance designation command that designates execution of a button advance notice, etc.) to the performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of performing the action promotion performance based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific variation and the power is then turned on (for example, when a variation pattern designation command designating a specific variation pattern (with button advance notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the means may interrupt the initial operation being performed (about 20 seconds) and switch to a shortened initial operation having a shorter operation period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial operation being performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movable control that takes into consideration the onset of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The performance control means is capable of executing a start performance (e.g., a start notice) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started,
The start performance is as follows:
An introduction part (see FIG. 48 (B2) to (B6)),
A result notification part (see FIG. 48 (B3a) to (B6a)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the start notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 95).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the start-up performance is not hindered by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning performance designation command designating execution of a start notice) to the performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of performing the start performance based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power interruption occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and the power is then turned on (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation ends before the notification part is started as a result of the start-time notice),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movable control that takes into consideration the onset of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The performance control means is capable of performing a variable display of the identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and is capable of performing a variable display notification performance (e.g., a pseudo consecutive announcement) that notifies the user that the variable display of the identification information will be performed after the variable display of the identification information is temporarily stopped.
The reconfigurable display notification performance is
An introduction part (see (C3) to (C5) of FIG. 49) inviting the user to decide whether or not the re-variable display of the identification information is to be executed;
A result notification part (see (C6), (C10), and (C9) of FIG. 49) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the variable display of the identification information based on the specific variable display pattern starts and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 96).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification performance is not impeded by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning performance designation command designating execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) to the performance control means;
The presentation control means is capable of performing the re-variable display notification presentation (e.g., a pseudo consecutive announcement) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power interruption occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that may be configured to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation ends before the notification part is started as a result of the pseudo consecutive announcement based on a specific performance control command by the performance control CPU 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movable control that takes into consideration the onset of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The normal state is a state designed to launch the game medium to the first game area (e.g., the left game area),
The special state is a state designed to launch the gaming medium to the second gaming area (e.g., the right gaming area),
The display means is capable of displaying a first game area side launch promotion display (e.g., a left hit promotion display 132SG530) in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) in the normal state, which urges the player to launch the game medium toward the first game area, and is also capable of displaying a display corresponding to the normal state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, and then the initial operation is performed when the power is started up by a hot start and restored, the part is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the left hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. See Figures 97 and 98).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the first game area side promotion notification is not hindered by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is
The display means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) until the variable display ends when a power interruption occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on,
When the recovery display is displayed, it is possible to perform the first game area promotion notification (for example, left hit promotion display 132SG530).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the launch direction of gaming media even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is
As the first game area promotion notification, it is possible to display a first game area promotion notification display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) and output a first game area promotion notification sound.
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on with initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, while the output of the first game area promotion notification sound is limited;
When the confirmation movement control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output (for example, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is restricted, and when the operation confirmation control is performed based on starting up with a hot start after a power outage occurs, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform an appropriate first game area promotion notification taking into consideration the situation when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 16-4 is
In the normal state, when a gaming medium enters a predetermined area (e.g., a passing gate 41, etc.) provided on the second gaming area side, it is possible to perform the first gaming area promotion notification (e.g., a left hit promotion display 132SG530),
A special first game area promotion notification having a higher priority than the first game area promotion notification can be performed based on the fact that a specific number of game media have entered the predetermined area in the normal state,
The confirmation movement control makes it possible to perform the special first game area promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is movable (for example, a special left-hit operation promotion notification having a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification can be performed based on the entry of a specific number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) into the gate switch 21 in a normal state, and the operation confirmation control makes it possible to perform a special left-hit operation promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is operated (e.g., 20 seconds)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the special first game area promotion notification is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The display means includes:
If a power outage occurs during the round game and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) in a predetermined display area.
Thereafter, in the predetermined display area, it is possible to display displays corresponding to the round of play (for example, the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.).
When displaying either the display corresponding to the round game or the display during recovery, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompting display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in a specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during a round game in a jackpot game state, and then the power is started with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap the front side of the right hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front side of a predetermined area (see FIG. 83(A)) in which information corresponding to the round game (for example, the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the ball number display 132SG453, the consecutive number of balls/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. See FIG. 99 and FIG. 100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the predetermined movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movable control (for example, after a power interruption occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation at the time of power-on is performed in an operation manner that includes a performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompting display 132SG430, while after a power interruption occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in a time-saving state, the initial operation at the time of power-on is performed in an operation manner that does not include a performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right-hit prompting display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
The display means is
If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510).
As the display during recovery, text information indicating that recovery is in progress can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
Along with the recovery display, it is possible to display a launch direction indication display (for example, right-hit prompting display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round play in a jackpot game state and then the game is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is not overlapped in front of the right hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being overlapped in front of the recovery display 132SG510. See Figs. 99 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body operated by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the text information indicating that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined performance movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined performance movable control (for example, after a power interruption occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power interruption occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in a time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 18-3 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control for moving the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the special movement control is superimposed on the predetermined display area,
the confirmation movement control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner including the special action in the special movement control,
The time that the movable body moved by the special movement control stays in the specified display area is longer than the time that the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control performed when a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on (for example, the time that the under-board movable body 32B stays in the performance position overlapping the recovery display 132SG510 may be set to be shorter than the performance operation of the movable body performance in the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a power outage occurs during an advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movement control that is performed is not superimposed on a specified display area for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not interfere with determining whether or not recovery is in progress.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The display means is
If a power outage occurs during the special state and the power is then turned on, a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area;
Thereafter, a display corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the predetermined display area,
When displaying either the display corresponding to the special state or the display during recovery, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompting display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in a specific display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during variable display in a time-saving state, and then the power is started with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is not overlapped on the front side of the specific area (see FIG. 101(A)) in which the right hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed, rather than being overlapped on the front side of the predetermined area (see FIG. 101(B)(C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the time-saving remaining display 132SG201, the consecutive number of balls/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. See FIG. 101).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which is a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control and has a large impact on gameplay, is not obstructed as much as the recovery in progress display.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined performance movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined performance movable control (for example, the initial operation is performed in an operation manner that includes the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompting display 132SG430, while the initial operation at the time of power-on after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during variable display in the time-saving state is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right hit prompting display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A movable body,
A movable body control means;
A display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
the display means is capable of displaying, in the special state, a launch direction indication display indicating a launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and displaying information relating to the advantageous state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the predetermined display area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game using a movable body operated by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the visibility of information regarding advantageous states.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined performance movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined performance movable control.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The game control means is capable of performing specific identification information light emission control to indicate the result of the variable display of the specific identification information by a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the CPU 103 is a part that can light up a plurality of lamps constituting a special pattern in a combination according to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has begun through the startup preparation display, and a gaming machine can be provided that allows the specific identification light-emitting control, which has a large impact on gameplay, to be confirmed without being distracted by the movable body that operates through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display is started based on the establishment of the start condition while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B) , the portion where the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to a variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
When a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power failure was not completed while the start-up preparation display was being displayed and before the confirmation movable control was performed, the display means displays a display of the recovery in progress (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the portion where the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
Further provided with a reservation storage means (for example, the special chart reservation storage unit 132SG151 shown in FIG. 9) capable of storing reservation information regarding variable display,
When a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the variable display that was being performed before the power failure is terminated and the variable display is started based on the hold information that was stored before the power failure, the display means displays the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the portion where the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to a variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Mode 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The light emission control means is capable of performing initialization-responsive light emission control for causing a plurality of light emission means to emit light in a mode corresponding to initialization (for example, as shown in Figs. 61 and 62, a portion for causing frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an upper board movable body LED 9d, a lower board movable body LED 9e, an upper frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g to emit light in an initialization notification mode).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the portion where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the initialization-compatible light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in an initialization notification mode).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the initial operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board face-line 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has begun by the startup preparation display, and a gaming machine can be provided that allows the initialization-compatible light-emitting control to be confirmed without being distracted by the movable body operating by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
Further comprising light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
When a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that recovery is in progress).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in an illumination pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
Further comprising light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
When a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that recovery is in progress).
Thereafter, when the variable display executed before the power outage is terminated while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, background display corresponding light emission control is performed in which the light emission control means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the background display (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background image).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in an illumination pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-4 is
Further comprising light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
When a power outage occurs during one of a plurality of rounds of play and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round of play),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that recovery is in progress).
Thereafter, when the one round of play that was being played before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), when the round of play that was being played before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top board movable body LED 9d, the bottom board movable body LED 9e, the top frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started while the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to a round of play (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-5 is
Further comprising light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
When a power outage occurs during one of a plurality of rounds of play and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round of play),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that recovery is in progress).
Thereafter, when the one round of play that was being played before the power outage ends and the next round of play of the one round of play is started while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B) , when the round of play that was played before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top board movable body LED 9d, the bottom board movable body LED 9e, the top frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Mode 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by performing an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The game control means includes:
When the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, when the result of the variable display of the normal pattern is a win (normal win), an opening control is executed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time).
When a power interruption occurs while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state, and when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the normal variable means to the easy-entry state again (for example, in the case where a power interruption occurs while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state based on the occurrence of a normal symbol win, a portion controls the variable winning ball device 6B to be in an open state again based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started by a hot start).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (e.g., startup preparation display 132SG500) when the power is turned on,
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107A, the portion where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has begun by the start-up preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine which, when the power is cut off when the normal variable means is in an easy-to-enter state and the power is turned on (power outage is restored), allows the player to quickly confirm that the normal variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body which operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107A, the portion where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the normal variable means that is in the easy-entry state due to the special control while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed after a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B that is in the open state).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 23-3 is
When a power interruption occurs during the variable display of normal identification information, the result of which is a predetermined display result, and the power is then turned on (for example, when the variable display of normal symbols is being executed before the power interruption occurs, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started up in a hot start mode),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107B, the portion where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-entry state (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by performing an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The game control means includes:
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-entry state in which the game medium can easily enter (for example, a portion that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state),
When a power interruption occurs while the variable means is in the easy-entry state, and then when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the variable means to the easy-entry state again (for example, in the case where a power interruption occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, a portion controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to be in the open state again based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started by a hot start).
The display means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)).
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a display indicating that the power is being restored (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion in which the display 132SG510 indicating that the power is being restored is displayed).
When the power is cut off during the advantageous state while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the display of the restoration in progress display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine which allows the player to quickly confirm that the variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off when the power is cut off and then turned on (power outage is restored) without being distracted by the movable body which operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
In the advantageous state, it is possible to play multiple rounds of games (for example, as shown in FIG. 8, a portion in which 3 to 10 rounds of games can be played as a jackpot game),
In a round game, it is possible to perform control to set the variable means to the easy-entry state and control to set the variable means to the non-entry state (for example, a part that controls the special winning ball device 7 to an open state and a part that controls the special winning ball device 7 to a closed state in a round game).
When the power is cut off while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, when the special control in one round of play ends and control is performed to make the variable means in the next round of play unable to enter the entry state while the start preparation display is being displayed, the recovery display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, when the round of play ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the wall s state, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The display means is
When power is turned on with initialization (e.g., cold start processing), it is possible to display an initialization display (e.g., initialization notification display 132SG600) indicating that initialization has been performed,
When power is turned on with initialization,
The initialization display is displayed,
Then, the confirmation movable control is performed,
After that, after the confirmation movable control ends, the display of the initialization display ends (see FIG. 109 and FIG. 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm that the gaming machine has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control does not prevent confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has been completed.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is
The period from power-on with initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed (for example, the period from power-on with initialization (start-up with cold start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (start-up with hot start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which, when the power is turned on to initiate initialization, confirmation movement control is not immediately performed, preventing the display of the initialization display from becoming visibly observable.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period;
Even if the start condition is satisfied while the initialization display is being displayed, the initialization display is not hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds) and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period, and even if a start winning occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is being displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 25-4 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, if the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform the operation check control in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of form 25-5 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the display of the initialization display is continued until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, after power-on without initialization (startup by hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 is not displayed, and the background display is performed based on the game state background designation command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B),
A second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The distance between the first movable body and the second movable body is closer when the first movable body is located at the advanced position and the second movable body is located at the advanced position than when the first movable body is located at the initial position and the second movable body is located at the initial position (see FIG. 111 );
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
The confirmation movement control is a control in which the first movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position so that the moving periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap, and then the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the moving periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A start moving from the origin position to the performance position at the same time so that their initial operation periods overlap (see FIG. 111 (B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position so that their initial operation periods do not overlap (see FIG. 111 (C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body can operate normally in the advanced position and that the second movable body can operate normally in the advanced position, thereby simplifying the confirmation work, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to individually confirm the movement of the first movable body from its advanced position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from its advanced position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the first movable body and the second movable body,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movement control means is capable of performing a performance movement control in which the first movable body is moved from an initial position to an advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to an advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap, and then the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the movement of the first movable body and the second movable body in the performance movement control (for example, for the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B that perform a performance movement in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap), in the operation confirmation control, an initial movement is executed in an operation manner that does not include the performance movement described in Figures 112 (B) to (D) (for example, a manner in which the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B are separately advanced)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is
Further comprising a detection means (e.g., a performance position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is disposed in the advanced position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the advance position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the on-board movable body 32A) arranged at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the below-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 26-4 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing return control to move the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, to the initial position when the movable body is not located at the initial position when the power is turned on (for example, a part in which return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part in which short initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) is performed when the movable body including the first movable body and the second movable body is not located at the origin position before the long initial operation control is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

[Mode 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B),
A second movable body (e.g., a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on a game board (e.g., game board 2),
The second movable body is provided in a game frame (for example, an opening and closing door frame 3a),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
As the confirmation movement control, an operation is performed to move the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position, and while the first movable body is stopped at the advanced position, an operation is performed to confirm that the second movable body is operating normally (for example, while the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 57 (F)), the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position. See Figures 57 (G) to (I)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which a first movable body being placed in an advanced position during confirmation movable control indicates that the confirmation movable control has not ended, and the operation of the second movable body is started when the first movable body is placed in the advanced position, thereby ensuring that the confirmation movable control of the second movable body is not overlooked.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is
Further comprising a detection means (e.g., a performance position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is placed in an initial position;
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) arranged at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings. In the following, the near side of FIG. 1 is the front (front face, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the rear (rear face, back) side, and the description is based on the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing with the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "132SGS1", "Normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach", and "Super reach" may be abbreviated to "SP reach".

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device. The game machine frame 3 is provided with an opening and closing door frame 3a having a glass window that can be rotated around the left side, and is configured so that the game area can be opened and closed by the opening and closing door frame 3a, and the game area can be viewed through the glass window when the opening and closing door frame 3a is closed.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns. The special patterns on the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are composed of multiple lamps (LEDs). The CPU 103 is capable of lighting these multiple lamps in a combination according to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, has a device with a movable piece that can move back and forth, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in a retracted position away from the game board surface, making it difficult for game balls to flow down the upper surface of the movable piece, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in a protruding position where the movable piece protrudes forward from the game board surface, making it possible for game balls to flow down the upper surface of the movable piece, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-mentioned device as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided to the right of the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

Below the variable winning ball device 6B, a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the opening and closing door frame 3a. Frame LEDs 9a, 9b are provided at the upper part and left and right sides of the opening and closing door frame 3a so as to surround the game area. In addition, an attacker LED 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), there are provided an above-board movable body 32A and a below-board movable body 32B that operate according to the performance. In addition, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are provided with movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG121 is provided with an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g. The movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the button LEDs 9g, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and the attacker LED 9c are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the opening and closing door frame 3a below the game area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the game machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

In addition, an operation unit 600 is provided at the center of the bottom of the opening and closing door frame 3a. The operation unit 600 includes a chance button 631B that the player can press, and a lever body 631A that the player can push and pull in the forward and backward directions and that is rotatable. The chance button 631B is movable up and down between an origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and is also movable between the origin position and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the origin position. In addition, a cross key that constitutes a selection button 132SG35 for setting the sound volume and other aspects of the presentation is provided on the upper tray of the opening and closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see Figure 2) for detecting the player's operation (action) of the chance button 631B, an origin position sensor 635C (see Figure 2) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is in the origin position, a protruding position sensor 635D (see Figure 2) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is in the protruding position, a vibration motor 635E (see Figure 2) for vibrating the chance button 631B, an advance/retract motor 635F (see Figure 2) for moving the chance button 631B forward and backward between the origin position and the protruding position, a push/pull sensor 625Y (see Figure 2) consisting of a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A, and a protruding position sensor 625C for detecting whether the lever body 631A is in the protruding position. The selection button 132SG35 is also provided with an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36 (see FIG. 2), which is made up of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor that detects the operation of the selection button 132SG35's cross key in the up/down/left/right directions.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The opening and closing door frame 3a has three performance units: a first performance unit 132SG100 attached to the upper center position, a second performance unit 132SG200 attached to the upper left side, and a third performance unit 132SG300 attached to the upper right side. The first performance unit 132SG100 is provided with a frame-mounted movable body 132SG121 that can move between the origin position and the performance position, as described below.

The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case (not shown). The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52 (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, the jackpot probability is set to 1/200 in this feature section 132SG, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set to a setting change state by operating the setting change switch 52, and the jackpot probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in this setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see FIG. 2) is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the large winning hole (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the second start winning hole (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have won the large winning hole (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out.
The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed by the opening and closing door frame 3a.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (10 times, 3 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

The time-saving state continues until one of the end conditions is met first, such as a predetermined number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. When the end condition is that a predetermined number of special games have been played, it is also called a time-saving state (time-saving state after time-saving).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and a specified recovery process is not performed after power is turned on). The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called the low base state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, in the first round of a jackpot (first jackpot) in normal mode, the large prize opening is opened in a jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the presentation shown in FIG. 52 (F8) is performed, and in the first round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in a small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time), so the presentation shown in FIG. 40 (C2) is performed. Also, in the second round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in a jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the displays, various lamps, and sounds are different between the first and second rounds.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switches (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the opening and closing door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals (signals output when an operation by the player is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation) from the push/pull sensor 625Y, the protruding position sensor 625C, the button sensor 635B, the origin position sensor 635C, the protruding position sensor 635D, the up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36, the origin position sensors 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and the presentation position sensors 132SG104, 132SG114, 132SG124, and 132SG134.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B to each movable body or to the drive circuit that drives the vibration motor 635E, the advance/retract motor 635F, and the drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132 of each movable body.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B (such as supplying signals to operate each movable body) may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 12. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process (see FIG. 12) of step S27.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

Figure 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 132SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 3 is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable display time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 4(A), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big win", or "minor win", and the determination result (big win type determination result) of which of several types of big win types the big win type will be when the variable display result is a "big win".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(A), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B."

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is a power-on command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold-started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed down (step S6 has been executed because the recovery condition was not met in step S3 of the game control main processing in FIG. 12)).

Command 9200H is a power outage recovery command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has been hot started (the power has been turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (step S4 has been executed because the recovery condition was met in step S3 of the game control main processing in FIG. 12).

Command 95XXH is a game state background designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. The game state background designation command is also a command that designates that the background image displayed on the image display device 5 be updated to a background image that corresponds to the game state. In the game state background designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4B, as a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is a second game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in one variable display of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A (high base state, time-saving state A). Command 9502H is a third game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in a maximum of 685 variable displays of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B (high base state, time-saving state C1). Command 9503H is a fourth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in a maximum of seven variable displays of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C (high base state, time-saving state B). Command 9504H is a fifth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state B) in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special chart up to 7 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. Command 9504H is a sixth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state C2) in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special chart up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

Command A0XXH is a start of win command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A3XXH is an end of win command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a big win game state or a small win game state.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or small win game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number in an identifiable manner in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number in an identifiable manner in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command C4XXH is a pattern designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a V winning notification designation command that notifies that a V has been won, in other words, that the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on as a result of the game ball passing through it. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special pattern time reduction count notification command that notifies the remaining number of time reduction controls for the second special pattern in the time reduction state. Command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command that notifies the number of prize balls generated (awarded) as a result of the game ball winning in the winning slot. Command E100H is a customer waiting demo designation command that specifies the execution of a customer waiting demo (demo performance).

Figure 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 5, in this feature unit 132SG, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the winning type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted on the main board 11 side. In addition, random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating them by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

6 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 132SG. In this feature section 132SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" and the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

Of these variation patterns, for the jackpot variation pattern, after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, an additional 15 seconds of special chart display time is set up to execute a congratulatory performance to celebrate the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the miss fluctuation pattern in this feature section 132SG have the same period until the variable display result is announced, preventing the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss based on the length of the period until the variable display result is announced.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern in this feature unit 132SG, an example is shown in which an additional 15-second special chart variable display time is provided for executing a congratulatory effect after the same special chart variable display time as the miss fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special chart variable display time for executing a congratulatory effect provided in the jackpot fluctuation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds and may vary depending on the game status.

As shown in Figures 6(A) and 6(B), this feature section 132SG has multiple different variation patterns pre-defined according to the special symbols that perform the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 6(A), the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol include jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns, which include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance such as super reach α or super reach β is executed, and a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which no reach performance is executed. Note that, although this feature section 132SG has only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach. Also, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern, super reach α variation pattern, and super reach β variation pattern for the first special symbol include a variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during the variable display is executed 1 to 3 times. In this feature section 132SG, the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is executed determines which of the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β reach performances is executed. For example, if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display, a normal reach reach performance is executed afterwards, if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display, a super reach α reach performance is executed afterwards, and if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display, a super reach β reach performance is executed afterwards.

Incidentally, of the reach effects that can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the Super Reach β reach effect is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and the Super Reach α reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach β reach effect. The normal reach reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach α reach effect (jackpot expectation of reach effects: Super Reach β > Super Reach α > Normal Reach). In other words, in this feature section 132SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation of that variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(B), the variation patterns of the second special symbols in this feature section 132SG include non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns (normal reach variation patterns in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach γ variation patterns in which the reach performance of a super reach γ is executed) that have special symbol variable display times different from the variation patterns of the first special symbols as jackpot variation patterns, small jackpot variation patterns, and miss variation patterns. Of these variation patterns of the second special symbols, the super reach γ variation pattern has the highest jackpot expectation, and the non-reach variation pattern has the lowest jackpot expectation (jackpot expectation in the second special symbols: super reach γ > normal reach > non-reach).

In addition, in this characteristic section 132SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these types are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables shown in FIG. 7 and the like, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern judgment table (see FIGS. 14 to 19) that stores a plurality of variation patterns that are the variation modes of each pattern in a variable display such as a special pattern or a normal pattern.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include, for example, display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 7(A), display result judgment table 2 shown in FIG. 7(B), big win type judgment table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 7(C), big win type judgment table (for second special symbol) shown in FIG. 7(D), small win type judgment table shown in FIG. 7(E), as well as various first special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment tables (see FIG. 14, FIG. 19), various second special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment tables (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 19), and regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (not shown).

7(A) and 7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result judgment table 1 and the display result judgment table 2. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning judgment value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result judgment table 1, a judgment value for a big win and a judgment value for a small win are set when the variable display special pattern designation buffer (a value that the CPU 103 sets when the special pattern normal processing is executed as a value that designates a special pattern that executes variable display) is 1 (first), that is, when the first special pattern is the target of variable display. In the display result judgment table 2, a judgment value for a big win and a judgment value for a small win are set when the variable display special pattern designation buffer (a value that the CPU 103 sets when the special pattern normal processing is executed as a value that designates a special pattern that executes variable display) is 2 (second), that is, when the second special pattern is the target of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is set to the first position, a judgment value corresponding to a big win is set, but a judgment value corresponding to a small win is not set. Therefore, when the first special pattern is the target of variable display, a big win is possible, but a small win will not occur. Note that the probability of winning a big win when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is set to the first position is approximately 1/200.

Also, as shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable display special chart designation buffer is set to the second level, a judgment value corresponding to a big win and a judgment value corresponding to a small win are set. When the variable display special chart designation buffer is set to the second level, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/200, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is the first (when the special pattern that performs the variable display is the first special pattern), if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 7(A), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (big hit A or big hit B). Also, when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is the second (when the special pattern that performs the variable display is the second special pattern), if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 7(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (big hit B), and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 7(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a small hit.

The "probability" shown in Figures 7(A) and 7(B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big win or a small win. Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to control the game to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to control the game to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B a small win pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in Figures 7 (A) and 7 (B), but a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table may be provided separately, and the determination of a big hit may be made using a common table for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern, regardless of the variable display special pattern designation buffer, and the determination of a small hit may be made using a separate table depending on the variable display special pattern designation buffer.

In addition, in this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display special chart designation buffer is the first, no judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to a big win is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small win, in other words, a small win cannot be won, but it is also possible to set some of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to a big win as judgment values corresponding to a small win, so that a small win can be won.

Figures 7(C) and 7(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 7(C) is a table when the jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 7(D) is a table when the jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be jackpot A or jackpot B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot pattern. In addition, in this feature section 132SG, as shown in Figures 7 (C) and (D), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern) has two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern) has only one type of jackpot, jackpot B. In other words, the jackpot that occurs when the first special pattern is variable displayed is either one of the two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot that occurs when the second special pattern is variable displayed is only jackpot B.

Figure 7 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. The small win type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win to be small win A or small win B based on the random number (MR2) for winning type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win pattern. Furthermore, in this characteristic section 132SG, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit A, that is, if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type C is executed, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, that is, if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D or jackpot E is executed, and if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, that is, if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type E is executed. In other words, these jackpots C through E are not determined by the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot extracted at the time of the initial winning, but by the fact that the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during either small jackpot A or small jackpot B.

Now, referring to FIG. 8, the jackpot types in this feature section 132SG are explained. In this feature section 132SG, the jackpot types are set to jackpot A through jackpot E, which execute time-saving control after the jackpot game state ends.

Of these jackpots A through E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the rounds that change the jackpot entry port to the second state that is advantageous to the player are executed three times (so-called three rounds). The interval period for each round in jackpot A is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state A until the special game is executed once for the variable display of the second special pattern, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

In jackpot B, the rounds that change the jackpot entry port to the second state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The interval period for each round in jackpot B is set to 0.5 seconds. After the jackpot game state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C1 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special pattern, or until a maximum of a total of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

The jackpot C is a jackpot in which the jackpot entry port is changed to the second state, which is advantageous to the player, three times (so-called 3 rounds). The interval period between each round in the jackpot C is set to 0.5 seconds for the first and second rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. After the jackpot game state ends, the time-saving control is executed as the time-saving state B until a maximum of 7 special game games are executed for the variable display of the second special pattern, or until a maximum of 11 special game games are executed for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

The jackpot D is a jackpot that changes the jackpot entry port to the second state, which is advantageous to the player, nine times (so-called 9 rounds). The interval period for each round in the jackpot D is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second and fourth to ninth rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. After the jackpot game state of the jackpot D ends, the time-saving control is executed as the time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games are executed for the variable display of the second special pattern, or until a maximum of 11 special game games are executed for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

The jackpot E is a jackpot that changes the jackpot entry port to the second state, which is advantageous to the player, nine times (so-called 9 rounds). The interval period for each round in the jackpot E is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second and fourth to ninth rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. After the jackpot game state of the jackpot E ends, the time-saving control is executed as the time-saving state C2 until a maximum of 685 special game games are executed for the variable display of the second special pattern, or until a maximum of 689 special game games are executed in total for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

In this way, the interval period for the third round from jackpot C to jackpot E is set to 30 seconds, and this feature section 132SG can execute the promotion effect described below as an effect that suggests that the jackpot game will continue up to the ninth round over those 30 seconds.

In each time-saving state, the probability of a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B; in other words, the occurrence of the second start winning makes it easier for the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed, making it easier for a small hit to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time-saving state ends, a big hit may occur as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur when the game ball enters a V during a small hit game, resulting in a so-called consecutive win state in which big hit game states tend to occur continuously.

In addition, in time-saving state A after the end of jackpot play on jackpot A, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to one, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot in either the one variable display of the second special symbol and the one variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during the one variable display of the second special symbol (the total percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of five variable displays of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters the V) is set to approximately 54%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of jackpot play for jackpot D, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to seven, so the percentage of variable display results that will be a jackpot or small jackpot in either of the seven variable displays of the second special symbol and the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during the seven variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of 11 variable displays of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters the V) is set to approximately 83%.

In addition, in the time-saving state C2 after the end of jackpot play on jackpot B or jackpot E, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to 685 times, so the percentage of variable display results that will be a jackpot or small jackpot in either of the 685 times of variable display of the second special symbol and the maximum of four variable displays of the second special symbol based on reserved memories that occur during the 685 times of variable display of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of 685 times of variable display of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters the V) is set to almost 100%.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, four types of jackpots are provided, jackpot A to jackpot E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be five or more types of jackpots, or there may be three or less types of jackpots.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 132SG150 as shown in FIG. 9 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 132SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a special pattern reserve memory section 132SG151, a regular pattern reserve memory section 132SG151C, a game control flag setting section 132SG152, a game control timer setting section 132SG153, a game control counter setting section 132SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 132SG155.

The special symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151 stores, in order of winning, reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a start winning (first start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A but has not yet started, and reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B but has not yet started.

As an example, the special chart reserve memory unit 132SG151 associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and stores the start port buffer value, the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, as reserved data, until the number of reserved data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "8"). The number of reserved data stored in response to winning in the first start winning port and the number of reserved data stored in response to winning in the second start winning port are each up to four.

The reserved data thus stored in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SG151 indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a separate reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. Furthermore, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in a separate reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number, one of the variable display based on the first reserved information and the variable display based on the second reserved memory information may be executed in preference to the variable display based on the other reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they were detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 132SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 132SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 132SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 132SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores not only a performance control program, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The special symbol variable display performance control pattern corresponds to a number of different variation patterns and is composed of data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as the variable display operation of decorative symbols, the performance display operation in reach performance, re-draw performance, etc., during the period from when the special symbol starts to vary in the special symbol game to when the confirmed special symbol that is the special symbol display result is derived and displayed, or various performance display operations that do not involve the variable display of decorative symbols. The advance notice performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents of the performance operation that becomes the advance notice performance that is executed in response to advance notice patterns, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance. The various performance control patterns correspond to various performance operations that are executed depending on the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control contents.

The control patterns for controlling the presentation of special charts during variable display may include, for example, multiple types of reach presentation control patterns in which the presentation manner in each reach presentation is different for each variation pattern that executes the reach presentation.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a performance control data holding area 132SG190 as shown in FIG. 10(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 132SG190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 132SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 132SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 132SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 132SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A as shown in FIG. 10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 132SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "8") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory (for example, "8"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special pattern being variably displayed. When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, three commands, namely, a start port winning designation command (first start port winning designation command or second start port winning designation command), a pattern designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (entry) reserved for storing the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory together by associating these start winning designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory number notification commands.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "0" which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the decorative pattern change stop process which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A of this feature section 132SG, a memory area for setting a pending display flag value indicating the display mode of the pending display or active display in the advance notice setting process (Fig. 35) described later, and a memory area for setting a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the variable display corresponding panel or the second special chart pending memory corresponding panel displayed on the image display device 5 in the time-saving state A are reserved for each buffer number.

When a start win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands in the start win reception command buffer 132SG194A, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number). When a start win occurs, the start win designation command through the pending memory count notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the ends of the buffer numbers corresponding to the pending memories, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) are deleted from the entry (buffer number "0") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that has just ended, and the contents stored in the entry (entry corresponding to buffer number "1") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is to start and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer numbers "3", "4", "5", etc. is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer numbers "2", "3", "4", etc. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the reserved memory that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, or a pending memory number notification command. If these commands have been received, these commands are stored at the top of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A as pending memory for each special pattern.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed. The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

After executing the recovery process or initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is generated periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and if necessary, it is possible to issue a warning depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG. In the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG, the special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, a determination is made as to whether to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal process, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" or a "small hit", the big hit type in the case of a "big hit", and the small hit type in the case of a "small hit" are determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a determined special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a miss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" and the normal special symbol processing ends. In addition, this feature unit 132SG stores the winning order of the game balls into the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole, and the start conditions of the special symbol game are established in the winning order (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern as one of several types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result will be "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variable pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (variable special display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern variable display time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change has reached the special pattern variable display time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the determined special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

Step 132 The pre-opening process for small wins in SGS118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This pre-opening process for small wins includes processing to set the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the pre-opening process for small wins ends.

The small win open process of step 132SGS119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open process includes a process of measuring the time that has elapsed since the large win opening was opened, a process of determining whether it is time to return the large win opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, and a process of determining whether game balls have been detected by the second count switch 132SG024. When the large win opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open process ends.

The small win end process of step 132SGS120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the performance operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, if a game ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win game state ends, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "4" and the small win process ends. Also, if a game ball is not detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0" and the small win end process ends.

Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in Figure 13. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on or not (132SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (132SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (132SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in 132SGS102 (132SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 132SGS101 (132SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 132SGS102 (132SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (132SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (132SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the second reserved memory count in 132SGS105 is not the upper limit value (132SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "2" (132SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of 132SGS103 and 132SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 (132SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random number values thus extracted and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserved information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit (132SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of hit are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 132SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display state including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (132SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special pattern process is completed.

Following the processing of 132SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (132SGS112). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (132SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed.

After executing the process of 132SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is advanced to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 15 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed by 132SGS112 in Figure 14 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 132SG, when the variable display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is started, the special pattern normal process (S110 in Figure 13) determines whether or not the special pattern display result (the variable display result of the special pattern) is controlled to a big win game state as a "big win" or whether or not it is controlled to a small win game state as a "small win". In addition, in the variable pattern setting process (S111 in Figure 13), a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of S112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the big win pattern or the small win pattern is derived and displayed as the special pattern display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of a game ball entering the starting winning hole begins, that is, before it is determined at the start of the variable display whether it will be a big hit or a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120 and other devices will execute pre-reading predictions such as panel display presentations and hold preview presentations, as described below.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the game state is normal or time-saving (step 132SGS121). Then, it determines whether the set start port buffer value is 1 or not (step 132SGS122a). If the start port buffer value is 1, it selects display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 7(A) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122b), and if the start port buffer value is 2, it selects display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 7(B) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result judgment table, and judges whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the judgment range for a big win. If the random number value MR1 is outside the judgment range for a big win, it judges whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the judgment range for a small win (step 132SGS123b).

In step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is outside the range of the small win determination value, that is, if the variable display result is a miss, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a pattern designation command corresponding to the miss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS126b). If the start port buffer value is 1, if the game state is a normal state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 18 (A), and if the game state is one of the time-saving states, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19 (A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

If the start port buffer value is 2, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20(A) is selected if the game state is time-saving state A, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, which is the 1st to 7th variable display, and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 18(A) is selected if the game state is time-saving state C2, which is the 8th or subsequent variable display, and the program proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

In step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a small win (step 132SGS127). Then, if the game state is time-saving state A, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 20(C); if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 21(C); if the game state is normal state or time-saving state C2, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 18(C), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS128).

In step 132SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS130a). If the start port buffer value is 1, if the game state is the normal state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 18 (C), and if the game state is either the time-saving state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19 (B), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

In addition, if the start port buffer value is 2, when the game state is normal, if the game state is time-saving state A, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 20 (B) is selected, if the game state is time-saving state B, the 1st to 7th variable display of time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 21 (B) is selected, and if the game state is normal or the 8th or subsequent variable display of time-saving state C2, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 22 (B) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS130c).

In step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 132SGS109, and determines the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). Then, it sets up the transmission of a fluctuation category designation command (any one shown in FIG. 15(B)) according to the determination result, and ends the random number value determination process at the time of winning (step 132SGS132).

The commands set for transmission in steps 132SGS124, 132SGS126a, 132SGS127, 132SGS129, and 132SGS132 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Figure 16 is a flow chart showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) shown in Figure 13. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is a reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). If there is no reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151, demo display settings such as sending settings for a customer waiting demo designation command are performed and the normal special symbol processing ends (step 132SGS572). The customer waiting demo designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing (see Figure 12).

If there is a reserved memory in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151, the start port buffer value and the random number values MR1 to MR3 are read and identified from the reserved number "1" in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS542). The values of the number of reserved special charts to be variably displayed and the total number of reserved special charts are incremented by 1, and the memory contents of the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

It is also determined whether the start opening buffer value identified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, the variable display special chart designation buffer value is set to 1 (step 132SGS544b), and if the start opening buffer value is 2, the variable display special chart designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Next, a display result judgment table according to the variable display special chart designation buffer value is set (step 132SGS555). Then, the random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 is compared with the display result judgment table set in step 132SGS555 to judge whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of a big win (step 132SGS556). If the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the range of a big win, it is further judged whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of a small win (step 132SGS557). If the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of a small win, that is, if the variable display result is a small win, a small win flag is set (step 132SGS558). Then, a small win type determination table (see FIG. 7(E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the small win type is determined by comparing the selected small win type determination table with the random number value MR2 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS558b). Then, a small win type buffer value corresponding to the determined small win type is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). Note that if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the range of a small win, that is, if the variable display result is a miss, the process proceeds to step 132SGS570.

Also, if the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot in step 132SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 7(C) or FIG. 7(D)) corresponding to the variable display special chart designation buffer is selected (step 132SGS567), and the jackpot type is determined by comparing the selected jackpot type determination table with the random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

In step 132SGS570, the CPU 103 determines the confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the variable pattern setting process, and the normal special symbol processing is terminated (step 132SGS571).

Figure 17 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) shown in Figure 13. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special chart (step 132SGS131). Whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special chart may be judged, for example, by whether the variable display special chart designation buffer value is 1. If it is the variable display of the first special chart, a variable pattern determination table is selected from the variable pattern determination tables shown in Figures 18 and 19 according to the variable display result, game status, and number of reserved memories, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special charts is two or less, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 18 (A) is selected, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special charts is three or more, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 18 (B) is selected, and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 18 (C) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special chart variable pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19(A) is selected, and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special chart variable pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19(B) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special chart, a variation pattern determination table according to the variable display result, game state, value of the time-saving state variable display count counter (variable display count in each time-saving state), etc. is selected from Figures 20 to 23, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20(A) is selected, if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is time-saving state A, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 20(B) is selected, and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is time-saving state A, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 20(C) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C1, and the time-saving state C2, and the 12th to 685th variable display, the variable pattern determination table D for the second special chart shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected, if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C1, and the time-saving state C2, and the 12th to 685th variable display, the variable pattern determination table E for the second special chart shown in FIG. 21(B) is selected, and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C1, and the time-saving state C2, and the 12th to 685th variable display, the variable pattern determination table F for the second special chart shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected.

If the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table J shown in FIG. 23(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table K shown in FIG. 23(B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table L shown in FIG. 23(C) is selected.

After executing step 132SGS132 or step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern (step 132SGS135). In the processing of step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 identifies a variation pattern that includes the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing from among the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table, and determines the identified variation pattern as the variation pattern that executes the variable display.

Then, the variable display start setting for the special symbol is performed (step 132 SGS136), and various commands for starting the variable display, such as a variable pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variable pattern and a variable display result designation command, are set for transmission (step 132 SGS137), and a variable display time timer corresponding to the variable pattern is set (step 132 SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variable processing, and the variable pattern setting process is terminated (step 132 SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 132 SGS137 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

In addition, for the miss variation pattern in the variable display in the normal control state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 18 and 19, so that the non-reach variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β variation patterns are the least likely to be determined. On the other hand, for the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display in the normal control state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 22 and 23, so that the super reach β variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the super reach α and normal reach variation patterns are the least likely to be determined. For this reason, in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in the non-reach variation pattern, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) is the lowest, and the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β variation patterns are the most likely to be determined. In other words, the shorter the special chart change time, the lower the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the longer the special chart change time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the multiple variation patterns, for the variation patterns that execute a common reach performance, the variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance is set to have a higher jackpot expectation. For example, for the variation patterns that execute the reach performance of the super reach β, a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance and a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance are provided, but the variation pattern of the super reach β that executes the pseudo consecutive performance is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of the super reach β that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance. Similarly, for the variation patterns that execute the reach performance of the super reach α, a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance and a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance are provided, but the variation pattern of the super reach α that executes the pseudo consecutive performance is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of the super reach α that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, for the variation patterns that execute the reach performance of the normal reach, a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance and a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance are provided, but the variation pattern of the normal reach that executes the pseudo consecutive performance is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of the normal reach that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance.

Figure 24 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in Figure 13. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a symbol determination period timer, which will be described later, is running (step 132SGS201). If the symbol determination period is not running, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays a stopped symbol of the special symbol (step 132SGS202), and sets up the transmission of a symbol determination command (step 132SGS203). The symbol determination command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). If the jackpot flag is set, if any time-saving flag is set, the time-saving flag and other game state flags are cleared (step 132SGS205), and the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is cleared (step 132SGS206). Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the hit start 1 designation command or the hit start 2 designation command, and sets the transmission setting of the game state background designation command indicating that the game state is in the normal state, and proceeds to step 132SGS242 (step 132SGS207, step 132SGS208). The hit start designation command and the game state background designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Also, if the pattern determination period timer is operating in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern determination period timer by 1 (step 132SGS209) and determines whether the pattern determination period timer has timed out (step 132SGS210). If the pattern determination period timer has not timed out, the special pattern stop process is terminated, and if the pattern determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 further determines whether the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a losing pattern (step 132SGS211). If the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a losing pattern, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern process and terminates the special pattern stop process (step 132SGS212), and if the derived and displayed stopped pattern is not a losing pattern, the CPU 103 determines whether the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a winning pattern (step 132SGS213). If the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a big win pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big win pre-opening processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS214), and if the derived and displayed stopped pattern is not a big win pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win pre-opening processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS215).

If the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time-saving counter is 1 or more (step 132SGS216). The total time-saving counter is set to the sum of the maximum time-saving control count for the first special symbol and the maximum time-saving control count for the second special symbol in the time-saving state (either "5", "11", or "689").

If the value of the total time-saving counter is 1 or more, the value of the total time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special pattern designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether the completed variable display is the variable display of the first special pattern (step 132SGS218). If the variable display special pattern designation buffer value is 1, the process proceeds to step 132SGS224. If the variable display special pattern designation buffer value is 2 (if the completed variable display is the variable display of the second special pattern), the value of the second special pattern time-saving counter is decremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). The second special pattern time-saving counter is a counter in which the maximum time-saving control count (either "1", "7", or "685") of the second special pattern is set in the time-saving state.

In step 132SGS224, the CPU 103 judges whether any time-saving flag is set (whether any time-saving state is controlled). If none of the time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If any of the time-saving flags are set, the process further judges whether the value of the total time-saving counter has become 0, that is, whether the variable display of the maximum time-saving control count has ended in the controlled time-saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time-saving counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If the value of the total time-saving counter is 0, the process clears the set time-saving flag (step 132SGS226), clears the value of the total time-saving counter, and proceeds to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is set, the transmission setting of the hit start 3 designation command or the hit start 4 designation command is performed according to the type of small hit, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS242. The hit start 3 designation command and the hit start 4 designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12. If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer to a value corresponding to the symbol determination period (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of this feature unit 132SG), and sets the transmission of a symbol determination period designation command corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, it sets the transmission of a game state background designation command corresponding to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS243).

The pattern determination period designation command and the game state background designation command are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Figure 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S119 of Figure 13 as the processing during the small win opening. In the processing during the small win opening, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the opening time timer by 1 (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the opening time timer has timed out (132SGS282).

If the opening time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to 132SGS293. If the opening time timer has not timed out, the process determines whether or not it is time to open the large prize opening (132SGS283). If it is time to open the large prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the large prize opening to an open state by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the process sets the transmission of the large prize opening open command according to the round (132SGS285), and proceeds to 132SGS286. The large prize opening open command set for transmission in 132SGS285 is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to open the large prize opening, the process proceeds to 132SGS286 without passing through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

In 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to close the large prize opening (132SGS286). If it is time to close the large prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the large prize opening to a closed state by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS287). Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the command after the large prize opening is opened according to the round (132SGS288) and proceeds to 132SGS289. The command during the large prize opening that is set for transmission in 132SGS288 is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to close the large prize opening, the CPU 103 proceeds to 132SGS289 without passing through 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

In 132SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 is on or not (132SGS289). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not on, the small win opening process is terminated, and if the second count switch 132SG024 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, i.e., that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024, has been set (132SGS290). If the V winning flag is set, the small win opening process is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag (132SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS292). The V winning notification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Then, in 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10" (132SGS293), which is the value corresponding to the small win end process (S120), and ends the small win open process.

Figure 26 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed by 132SGS120 in Figure 13 as small hit end processing. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the small hit end display timer is operating or not (132SGS301). If the small hit end display timer is not operating (132SGS301; N), the small hit flag is cleared (132SGS302) and a hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit is set to the performance control board 12 (132SGS303). The hit end designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control processing described above. Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end display time (132SGS304), and the small hit end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the small win end display timer is operating, the value of the small win end display timer is decremented by 1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small win end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (132SGS306). If the small win end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 has not been turned on, the small win end process is terminated, and if the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on, it is determined whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, that is, that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024, has been set (132SGS308). If the V prize flag is set, the small win end process ends, and if the V prize flag is not set, the V prize flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS310) and ends the small win end processing. The V winning notification command is sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control processing described above.

In addition, when the small win end display time has elapsed in 132SGS306, the CPU 103 determines whether the V win flag is set or not (132SGS311). If the V win flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V win flag and sets the big win flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big win type from "Big Win C" to "Big Win E" based on the small win type in which the V win occurred (132SGS314). As shown in FIG. 7(E), if the small win type in which the V win occurred is a "small win A", the big win type is determined to be a "big win C", if the small win type in which the V win occurred is a "small win B", the big win type is determined to be a "big win D", and if the small win type in which the V win occurred is a "small win C", the big win type is determined to be a "big win E". The big win type thus determined is stored by, for example, setting the big win type buffer value, which is the storage value of the big win type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 (132SGS315).

In addition, the time-saving flag and the time-saving state variable display count counter are cleared (step 132SGS316, step 132SGS317), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4" (132SGS318), which is the value corresponding to the pre-big win release process (S114), and the small win end process is terminated.

In other words, in this feature section 132SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during the small win game but also during the period until the small win end display time has elapsed after the small win game ends. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big win hole just before the small win game ends, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024, and the big win game is executed after the small win end processing is completed.

If the V winning flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (132SGS319), which corresponds to the normal special symbol processing (S110), and ends the small win end processing.

Figure 27 is a flowchart of the jackpot end process shown in Figure 13. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot end display timer is running (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not running, the jackpot flag is cleared (step 132SGS322a), and the jackpot end designation command transmission setting according to the jackpot type is performed (step 132SGS322b). The jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. In addition, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time), and the jackpot end process is terminated (step 132SGS322c).

In addition, if the jackpot end display timer is operating in step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). If the jackpot end display timer has not timed out, the jackpot end process is terminated, and if the jackpot end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A (step 132SGS325). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special chart time-saving counter is set to "1" and the total time-saving counter is set to "5" (steps 132SGS326, 132SGS327). Then, the time-saving A flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is controlled to A, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

If the type of the jackpot is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot E (step 132 SGS328). If the type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot E, the second special chart time-saving counter is set to "685" and the total time-saving counter is set to "689" (steps 132 SGS329 and 132 SGS330). It is then determined whether the type of the jackpot is jackpot B (step 132 SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time-saving C1 flag indicating that the state is controlled to time-saving state C1 is set and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a); if the jackpot type is jackpot E, the time-saving C2 flag indicating that the state is controlled to time-saving state C2 is set and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

If the type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot D, the second special chart time-saving count counter is set to "7", and the total time-saving count counter is set to "11" (steps 132SGS335 and 132SGS336). Then, the time-saving B flag is set to indicate that the jackpot is in time-saving state B, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

In step 132SGS339b, the CPU 103 sets the game status background designation command for transmission according to the type of jackpot that has been executed (step 132SGS339b). The game status background designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. The CPU 103 also stores the game status background designation command for which transmission has been set (step 132SGS340), and ends the jackpot end process.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 28 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a startup preparation display display process (step 132SGS70) for displaying a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

In this embodiment, for example, the "boot preparation display" described in the embodiment is described as a "boot preparation image" in the drawings, and so "display" and "image" are sometimes used, but since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" may be described as "image" and "image" as "display."

The initialization process of step S71 prevents the startup preparation display displayed by the startup preparation display process of step SGS70 from being initialized. By displaying the startup preparation display, the user can quickly know that power has been supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can confirm that the image display device 5 can display the display normally.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, a power outage recovery display process (step 132SGS75b) is executed to display a power outage recovery display on the image display device 5 based on the power outage recovery designation command received from the CPU 103, and an initial operation control process (step 132SGS75c) is executed to execute the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up.

The startup preparation display process in this characteristic section 132SG includes a process of setting a cold start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a cold start when it is determined that a power-on command has been received, and the power outage recovery display process in this characteristic section 132SG includes a process of setting a hot start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a hot start when it is determined that a power outage recovery command has been received.

After the initial operation control process, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update process (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a volume/light intensity adjustment process (step 132SGS79) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity of each LED, and a background image update process (step 132SGS80) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the received background image designation command based on the background image designation command received from the CPU 103 are executed. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command until the customer waiting demo performance starts, and may start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 29, the initial operation control process is roughly divided into two processes: an origin placement control process (step 132SGS100) that places the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at their respective origin positions, and an operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS200) that confirms the operation of these movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101).

Figure 30 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in the origin placement control processing in Figure 29. In the origin placement control processing shown in Figure 30, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132 SGS401). If the origin operation period timer is not operating, it further determines whether the start-time origin placement control completed flag is set (step 132 SGS402). If the start-time origin placement control completed flag is not set, it determines whether it is the start timing of a demo performance (step 132 SGS403). Whether it is the start timing of a demo performance can be determined by, for example, determining whether the process timer for the demo performance is operating or not, and whether the value of the process timer for the demo performance is a value corresponding to the start timing of a demo performance.

If it is not the start timing of the demo performance, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display (132SGS404). Whether it is the start timing of the variable display can be determined, for example, by determining whether the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is operating or whether the value of the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is a value corresponding to the start timing of the variable display. If it is not the start timing of the variable display, the origin placement control process is terminated.

Then, if the start-up origin placement control completed flag is not set in step 132SGS402, if it is not the start timing of the demo performance in step 132SGS403, or if it is not the start timing of the variable display in step 132SGS404, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detection status of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the movable body to be controlled (step 132SGS410), and determines whether there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS411). If there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG412), and control of the movement of the non-detected movable bodies toward the origin is started by means of driving a motor corresponding to the non-detected movable bodies (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. Note that if there are no movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor in step 132SGS411, that is, if all movable bodies are located at their respective origin positions, the process proceeds to step 132SGS414 without executing steps 132SGS412 and 132SGS413.

In step 132SGS414, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detected movable body (the movable body placed at the origin position). Then, it sets the detection time operation process data of the detected movable body (step 132SGS415), starts the timer count of the detection time operation process timer, and starts the operation control of the movable body (detected movable body), as well as the display control of the image display device 5, the sound output control of the speakers 8L, 8Rk, etc., and the light emission control of each LED (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, it starts the timer count of the origin operation period timer and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS417).

Also, if the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the values of both the detection time operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). Then, it is determined whether the origin operation period timer after subtraction has timed out (timer expired) (step 132SGS421). If the origin operation period timer after subtraction has not timed out, it controls the operation based on the process data corresponding to the detection time operation process timer value after subtraction, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS422).

If the origin operation period timer has expired in step 132SGS421, the operation of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423) and the detection status of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body to be controlled is identified (step 132SGS424). Then, it is determined whether there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS425).

If there are any movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG426), and if the start-up origin placement control completed flag is not set, the flag is set and the origin placement control process is terminated (step 132SGS427). Note that if there are no movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, the process of step 132SGS427 is executed and the origin placement control process is terminated.

Figures 31 and 32 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in the operation confirmation control process in Figure 29. As mentioned above, a cold start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 pressed, that is, the initialization process (step S6) being executed in the game control main process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a hot start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 not pressed, that is, the recovery process (step S4) being executed in the game control main process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

In the operation confirmation control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the post-confirmation operation in progress flag is set (step 132 SGS501). If the post-confirmation operation in progress flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmation in progress flag is set (step 132 SGS502). If the operation confirmation in progress flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmed flag is set (step 132 SGS503).

If the operation confirmation flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated, and if the operation confirmation flag is not set, it is further determined whether the startup origin placement control flag is set (step 132SGS504). If the startup origin placement control flag is not set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated, and if the startup origin placement control flag is set, the operation confirmation in progress flag is set (step 132SGS505), and it is determined whether there is a memory of an undetected movable body (step 132SGS506). If there is no memory of an undetected movable body, proceed to step 132SGS508, and if there is a memory of an undetected movable body, the operation of the undetected movable body is restricted before proceeding to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

In step 132SGS508, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the start type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with a cold start or a hot start) and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the start type. In addition, in step 132SGS508, it identifies whether the cold start flag or the hot start flag is set, and if the cold start flag is set, it identifies the start type as cold start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the cold start, and if the hot start flag is set, it identifies the start type as hot start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the hot start.

Then, the operation confirmation process timer (upper) starts counting, and the operation control of the movable body as well as the display control of the image display device 5, the sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emission control of each LED are started, and the operation confirmation control process ends (step 132SGS509).

If the operation check execution flag is set in step 132SGS502, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the operation check process timer (upper) (step 132SGS510) and identifies the process data corresponding to the value of the operation check process timer after the subtraction (step 132SGS511). Then, it is determined whether the identified process data is completion data (step 132SGS512). If the identified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the identified process data is corresponding data of the performance position (step 132SGS513). If the identified process data is not corresponding data of the performance position, it proceeds to step 132SGS515, and if the identified process data is corresponding data of the performance position, it stores the performance result of the corresponding movable body's performance position sensor and then proceeds to step 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

In step 132SGS515, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process switching flag is set. If the process switching flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the process switching flag is not set, the CPU 120 further determines whether it is the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body performance is executed (step 132SGS516). If it is not the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body performance is executed, the operation of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emission of each LED are controlled based on the process data identified in step 132SGS511, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS517).

In addition, if it is the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body performance is executed, the start type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with a cold start or a hot start) is identified, and the lower-level switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in Figure 33 is identified according to the identified start type (step 132SGS518).

For example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the identified startup type is a cold start, image display control on the image display device 5 and LED light emission control are identified as the lower-level switching control types, and when the identified startup type is a hot start, image display control on the image display device 5 and sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R are identified as the lower-level switching control types.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower-level switching control type to lower-level process data among the process data identified in step 132 SGS 518 (step 132 SGS 219), and sets the process switching flag (step 132 SGS 520). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control based on the non-switched process data among the process data identified in step 132 SGS 218, and ends the operation confirmation control process (step 132 SGS 521).

Also, in step 132SGS512, if the process data identified in step 132SGS511 is not completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detection positions of the origin position sensors of each movable body (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) (step 132SGS530), and identifies a malfunctioning movable body from the detection results of the performance position sensors (performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) and stores the malfunctioning movable body as a movable body with limited operation (step 132SGS531). Furthermore, the operation check in progress flag is cleared (step 132 SGS 532), and it is determined whether the process switching in progress flag is set (step 132 SGS 533).

If the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmation flag is set (step 132 SGS534), and all control process data is switched to the performance control process data (lower), and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132 SGS535). If the process switching flag is set, the process switching flag is cleared (step 132 SGS536), and if the target type is a cold start, the sound output control control process data is switched to the performance control process data (lower) (step 132 SGS536a). In addition, the chance button and the on-board movable body are identified as the movable body to be operated, and the post-confirmation operation process data (upper) is set (step 132 SGS537), and the timer count of the post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) is started to start the operation control and LED light emission control of the chance button and the on-board movable body (step 132 SGS538). In addition, the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132 SGS539).

Also, if the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set in step 132SGS501, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts -1 from the value of the post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS540), and identifies the process data corresponding to the post-confirmation operation process timer value after the subtraction (step 132SGS541). Then, it is determined whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS542).

If the identified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the identified process data corresponds to the presentation position (step 132SGS543). If the identified process data is not corresponding data to the presentation position, the operation confirmation control process is terminated, and if the identified process data is corresponding data to the presentation position, the detection results of the presentation position sensors (protruding position sensor 635D and presentation position sensor 132SG124) of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A are stored and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS544).

If the identified process data is completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detection results of the origin position sensors (origin position sensor 635C and origin position sensor 132SG123) of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A (step 132SGS545), and determines whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position (step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS548, and if the chance button 631B is not located at the origin position, the process stores the chance button 631B as a motion-restricted movable body and proceeds to step 132SGS548 (step 132SGS547).

In step 132SGS548, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position. If the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS550. If the on-board movable body 32A is not located at the origin position, the on-board movable body 32A is stored as a motion-restricted movable body and the process proceeds to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

In step 132SGS550, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the process data for movable body control and LED light emission control to performance control process data (lower). Then, the operation check execution flag is cleared to end the operation check control process (step 132SGS551).

By executing the origin placement control process and operation confirmation control process as described above, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the movable body control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (upper order), and the display control is executed based on the performance control process data (lower order).

Also, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the movable body control and LED light emission control are executed based on the process data for operation confirmation (upper order), and the display control and sound output control are executed based on the process data for performance control (lower order).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 34(C), during the execution period of post-confirmation operation control, operation control of the chance button 631B and the movable body on the board (movable body control) and LED light emission control are executed based on the post-confirmation operation process data (upper order), and display control and sound output control are executed based on the performance control process data (lower order).

35 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 28 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in FIG. 35, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a pre-reading notice setting process in this feature section 132SG based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11, and displays a reserved display notice performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot by the display mode of the reserved display as a pre-reading notice, and displays a panel image on the image display device 5 for one variable display of the second special pattern in the time-saving state A and four variable displays of the second special pattern immediately thereafter, and is capable of executing a panel performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot at different rates according to the display mode of these panel images. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a pending display preview performance, a value according to the display mode of the decided pending display is set as the pending display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be displayed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132 SGS 194A, and if it is decided to execute a panel display performance, a value according to the display mode of the decided panel display is set as the panel display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be displayed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132 SGS 194A, thereby starting the display of these pending displays and panel displays (see FIG. 10 (B)).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance also executes a result performance execution process (step 132SGS162). In the result performance execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred since the first hit occurs and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are counted, and when the last variable display in the time-saving state (time-saving state A is the four variable displays immediately after the end of the time-saving state) ends and the normal state is controlled (during the pattern determination period), a process is performed to execute a result performance that displays the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out on the image display device 5. Note that, in this feature section 132SG, when controlled in the time-saving state C2, there are exceptional cases in which the result performance is executed from the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special chart to the eleventh variable display.

The CPU 120 for controlling the effects also executes a process for executing an entry effect (step 132SGS163). In the process for executing an entry effect, for example, an entry effect is executed to notify that the time-saving state has been entered from the ending effect of the jackpot game until the first variable display after the jackpot game.

After executing the processing of step 132SGS163, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, or step 132SGS177, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special symbol hit waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol for the symbol fixation period indicated by the symbol fixation command, based on receiving a command (any of the first symbol fixation command, second symbol fixation command, third symbol fixation command, and fourth symbol fixation command) that specifies the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol received in the variable display performance process.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation judges whether or not a presentation control command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11 at the end of the pattern determination period. Then, when a presentation control command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the presentation processing during a small win. In addition, if a command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it judges that the display result in the special chart game was a "miss" and updates the value of the presentation process flag to the initial value "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the waiting process for the special chart hit is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step 132SGS176 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "6". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process of step 132SGS177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process is terminated.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 35. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received (step 132SGS601). If the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A is shifted up by one buffer number (step 132SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased. Also, if the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After executing step 132SGS602, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 132SGS605) and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 132SGS606).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a remaining time-saving count display process (step 132 SGS608) for displaying the remaining number of time-saving controls (remaining number of time-saving controls) in the time-saving state on the image display device 5, a time-saving end countdown display process (step 132 SGS609) for displaying a countdown of the remaining number of times until the time-saving control ends (also called a countdown performance or time-saving end countdown) on the image display device 5 when the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number, and a variable display preview performance determination process (step 132 SGS610) for executing a variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game status, and variable display result (step 132 SGS611), and starts the process timer (step 132 SGS612).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and chance button 631B are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as described later, an example is shown in which the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage or the like during the variable display when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to any of the time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C2, the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may not be resumed during the variable display even if the power is restored, and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may be resumed at the start of the next variable display (the timing when the value of the time-saving counter is updated). Also, even if the power supply is stopped when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to any of the time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C2 but there is no reserved memory and the variable display is not being executed (in a customer waiting state), the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may not be resumed even if the power is restored, and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may be resumed at the start of the next variable display or from the variable display after the value of the time-saving counter is updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (chance button 631B, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (132SGS613). For example, to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (132SGS614). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (132SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (132SGS616).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

(Flow of the performance)
Next, the flow of the performance in the variable display in this feature part 132SG will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, when the game state is in the normal state, the reach performance of the super reach performance is started by the progress of the variable display of the first special chart, and a predetermined period has passed, as part of the reach performance, an operation prompting image that prompts the operation of the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, a movable body performance in which the under-board movable body 32B operates as part of the reach performance is executed, and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot (X6 to X10). After that, a notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player that the variable display result has become a jackpot, and then a right hit notification is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot game state is a state in which the game balls are shot toward the right game area to enter the big prize opening, and a round performance during the round game is displayed (X11 to X13).

When the jackpot game is a jackpot A jackpot game, as shown in Figures 38 and 39, when the jackpot game ends, a breakthrough performance A is executed, which indicates that the game has been controlled to the time-saving state A after going through the jackpot ending performance. During the execution of the breakthrough performance A, if there is a reserved memory of the first special chart, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special chart is executed in an extremely short special chart change time (0.5 seconds). In addition to being controlled to the time-saving state A, the breakthrough performance A executes a right-hit notification (A1 to A4) that notifies the player that the time-saving state A is in a state in which the game ball is shot toward the right game area to enter the second start winning hole and the variable display of the second special chart is executed.

When the player shoots the game ball towards the right game area in accordance with the entry effect A, the game ball enters the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special chart begins. At this time, a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Then, when the player continues to shoot the game ball towards the right game area and the game ball enters the second start winning hole, additional panel images corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special chart are displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Note that up to five of these panel images are displayed (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special chart currently being executed and the maximum number of reserved memories of the second special chart ("4").

When one variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state A ends, the game state is controlled from time-saving state A to the normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol begins. In this variable display, when the decorative symbols stop in a reach combination, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8 to A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small win, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect in which the under-board movable body 32B operates is executed, and then the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a combination indicating a small win. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to have the game ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024 (B1-B3).

When the player hits the game ball towards the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that control will be given to a big win game (B4-B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a miss, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss. After that, in the variable display corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memories of the second special chart, the remaining number of variable displays of the second special chart is notified on the image display device 5, and then an image similar to the first reserved memory of the second special chart is displayed (B6 to B8).

If all the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memory of the second special symbol are misses, during the final pattern determination period of the variable display of the second special symbol, an image indicating that all the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memory of the second special symbol have ended (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END...") is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, while the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 10 times. Also, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) (B9-B12).

In either of the time-saving states, the player hits the game ball into the right game area, causing the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special chart is mainly executed. After the big win game via the small win of the second special chart ends, the game is controlled to the time-saving state B or the time-saving state C2.
As will be described later, if the power is cut off and restored during the period of Fig. 38 (A1) to (A4), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display until Fig. 38 (A5), and the movable body performs an initial operation for 26 seconds. Also, if the power is cut off and restored just before the end of Fig. 38 (A4) (within 5 seconds until the end) and the display period of the start preparation display overlaps with the period of Fig. 38 (A5), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display from Fig. 38 (A6) onwards (the timing when the restoration display is not displayed is Fig. 39 (B3), (B7)), and the movable body performs an initial operation for 26 seconds. Also, if the power is cut off and restored during Fig. 38 (A5), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display until the variable display corresponding to the second panel is started, and the movable body performs an initial operation for 26 seconds (the first time-saving variable time is longer than 26 seconds). In addition, if the power is cut off and then restored in FIG. 38 (A10) (5 seconds or more until the end of the fluctuation) (miss pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to FIG. 38 (B7), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to FIG. 39 (B6), and the shortened initial operation (taking into account the button performance) from FIG. 39 (B7). In addition, if the power is cut off and then restored in FIG. 38 (A10) (win pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to FIG. 39 (B3), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to FIG. 39 (B2), and the shortened initial operation (taking into account "Aim for V") from FIG. 39 (B3). Note that the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED 9e when the under-board movable body 32B is operating differs between the initial operation and FIG. 39 (B1).

Also, if the power is cut off and restored in FIG. 39 (B2) (within 5 seconds until the variable display ends) and the display period of the start preparation display overlaps with the period of FIG. 39 (B5), the image display device 5 will allow the user to see "Aim for V" after the display period of the start preparation display has elapsed, and the movable body will change the initial operation after the start preparation display is hidden to a shortened mode based on the main command (small win start command or small win open command) received in FIG. 39 (B3). Also, the large prize opening will start opening during the display period of the start preparation display. Also, if the power is cut off and restored in FIG. 39 (B3) (at the start (2 seconds left until the next round)), the image display device 5 will display a recovery display in a special mode (notifying that a small win has been won) until the open command (second round) is received after the V win (round 1), and the movable body will perform the initial operation in the normal mode (finished by the start of the next round), and the large prize opening will start opening during the display period of the start preparation display.

When the time-saving state B is entered after the big win game ends, that is, when the variable display result is a small win and the small win type is small win A or small win B, as shown in Figure 40, first, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination indicating a small win as the variable display of the second special chart. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to have the game ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024. When the player hits the game ball into the right game area during a small win game according to the image, and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that control will be given to a big win game (the "FEVER" image) (C1-C4).

Next, when the big win game via the small win ends, an image is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the number of winning balls won in the big win game as an ending performance. Then, after the entry performance B is executed in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 differs according to the number of times already controlled in the time-saving state, the first variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state B is started. In the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed while the background image of a night city (second background display) is displayed on the image display device 5 (C5 to C8).

If seven variable displays (seven variable displays of the second special chart) end without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win in the time-saving state B, a result presentation starts during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display. The result presentation displays a value according to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the first win or any time-saving state, or the total number of winning balls. If there is a reserved memory of the second special chart at the start of the result presentation, a maximum of four variable displays of the second special chart are executed in an extremely short special chart change time (0.5 seconds) according to the reserved memory (remaining reserved memory) of the remaining second special charts (C9 to C11).

If none of the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved memory result in a big win or a small win, the image display device 5 starts displaying a stage background image, and also displays an image for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area. After this, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until 10 variable displays are completed (C12 to C14).

In addition, when the time-saving state C2 is entered after the end of the jackpot game via a small win, that is, when the time-saving state C2 is entered after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot E, first, as in the case of being controlled to the time-saving state B, the display of a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win, the display of an image on the image display device 5 displaying "Aim for V!", the display of an image notifying the occurrence of a V prize during the small win game, the display of an image indicating that the game is being controlled to a jackpot game (the "FEVER" image), the display of an image according to the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game, the entry performance B in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is different depending on the number of times the game has already been controlled to the time-saving state, and the display of seven variable decorative symbols while the second background display is displayed are executed (C1 to C9 in FIG. 40).

Here, as shown in FIG. 41, when the seventh variable display of the decorative pattern (seven variable displays of the second special pattern) ends without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win, a result presentation starts during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display. The result presentation displays a value according to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the first win or any time-saving state, and the total number of winning balls. During the execution period of the result presentation, three variable displays of the decorative pattern (variable display of the second special pattern) are executed in an extremely short special pattern change time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result is neither a big win nor a small win in the three variable displays of the decorative pattern (eighth to tenth variable displays), a further variable display of the decorative pattern (eleventh variable display) is executed (D1 to D3).

If the 11th variable display does not result in a big win or a small win, the movable body 32A on the board moves and a light-emitting effect image corresponding to the movement of the movable body 32A on the board is displayed on the image display device 5. After the movable body 32A on the board falls, when the movable body 32A on the board returns to the standby position before it fell (the upper position of the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 is dimmed (displayed in black). After the dimming ends, an image indicating that the time-saving state has not yet ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Furthermore, on the image display device 5, an operation prompting image is displayed to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, a V stock effect is executed on the image display device 5 to notify that the number of time-saving control times in the time-saving state is 685 times, that is, that the variable display result during the time-saving state is essentially a big win or a small win. After that, when the V stock effect ends with the end of the 11th variable display, the 12th and subsequent variable displays are started in a state in which the second background display is displayed on the image display device 5 (D7 to D9). In particular, as shown in FIG. 41 (D2) to FIG. 41 (D8), in the result effect during the time-saving state C2 to the V stock effect, unlike the result effect corresponding to the time-saving state B, the right-hit notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden in order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time-saving control continues to be executed even after the result effect ends. The right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 will resume from the start of the 12th variable display.

[Display screen of image display device 5]
As shown in Figures 37 to 41, when the game state is the normal game state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a first reserved display area 132SG011 corresponding to the first reserved memory is provided on the left side of the active display area 132SG013. For example, in response to the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and in response to the value of the first reserved memory number being 4, four first reserved displays 132SG001 are displayed horizontally in the first reserved display area 132SG011.

When the game state is in the time-saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided at the bottom left of the display screen of the image display device 5, and above that, a second reserved display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second reserved memory is provided (see FIG. 92). For example, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013 provided at the left end of the display area, and in response to the value of the second reserved memory count being 4, four second reserved displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second reserved display area 132SG012.

In this embodiment, in order to consume winnings in order, if the second reserved memory is stored in the normal game state, the second reserved display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first reserved display area 132SG011, and if the second reserved memory is stored in the time-saving state, the first reserved display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second reserved display area 132SG012. However, for example, the first reserved display 132SG001 and the second reserved display 132SG002 may be displayed in the first reserved display area 132SG011.

In addition, a display area 5SL is provided at the top left of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4") and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, reserved display, small symbol, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, time reduction remaining display 132SG201, right hit promotion display 132SG430, etc. may be displayed in front of the performance images such as characters (upper layer) to prevent the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, small symbol, and error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind the performance images (lower layer) to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed, even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable body 32A on the board or the movable body 32B below the board covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command, thereby performing the variable display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern. Also, the performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command, thereby performing the variable display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

The pattern displayed on the fourth pattern display device provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7 at a specified location on the game board 2), such as the first special pattern LED or the second special pattern LED, is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

[Various moving parts]
Next, each movable body will be described based on Fig. 42 to Fig. 44. Fig. 42 is a diagram showing (A) a state where the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state where it is located at the performance position. Fig. 43 is a diagram showing (A) a state where the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state where it is located at the performance position. Fig. 44 is a diagram showing (A) a state where the on-frame movable body and chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) a state where they are located at the performance position.

As shown in Figures 42 and 43, an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B are provided on the front side of the game board 2. These above-board movable body 32A and below-board movable body 32B are also called "board-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the game board 2. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 44, an above-frame movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. These above-frame movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are also called "frame-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it cannot be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state, and the frame-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it can be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 42, the on-board movable body 32A is formed in a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32a with the letters "XXX" displayed on the front, and a support section 32b that supports the performance section 32a from the left and right sides, and is arranged to be movable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the on-board movable body 32A. In detail, the on-board movable body 32A is movable between an origin position at the front upper part of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 42(A) and a performance position at approximately the center of the front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 42(B), and a part (lower part) overlaps with the display area at the origin position, and the entire area overlaps with the display area at the performance position.

The on-board movable body 32A is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 132SG123, and at the performance position by the performance position sensor 132SG124. A plurality of on-board movable body LEDs 9d are provided inside, and the front surface of the on-board movable body LEDs 9d can be illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 43, the under-board movable body 32B is shaped roughly like a "fist" when viewed from the front, has a performance section 32c with a decoration displayed on the front, and a support section 32d that supports the performance section 32c from below, and is arranged to be movable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the under-board movable body 32B. In detail, the under-board movable body 32B is movable between an origin position at the front lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 43(A) and a performance position at approximately the front center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 43(B), with a part (upper part) overlapping the display area at the origin position and the entire area overlapping the display area at the performance position.

The underboard movable body 32B is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 132SG133, and at the performance position by the performance position sensor 132SG134. A plurality of underboard movable body LEDs 9e are provided inside, and the front surface can be illuminated by these underboard movable body LEDs 9e.

As shown in FIG. 44, the first performance unit 132SG100 has a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 that protrudes upward and forward from the upper edge of the opening and closing door frame 3a, and a frame-top movable body 132SG101 that is movable up and down on the front side of the base member 132SG105. The frame-top movable body 132SG101 is shaped to resemble a character (not shown) that is displayed in various performances of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and on the back side, frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R shaped to resemble the wings of the character are movably provided.

The first performance unit 132SG100 includes a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG102 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame-top movable body 132SG101, an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG104 for detecting that the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is located at the performance position, and a drive motor 132SG112 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG112 to the frame-top decorative part 132SG It has a drive mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member that transmits power to 132SG111L, 132SG111R, an origin position sensor 132SG113 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R are located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R are located at the performance position, and an above-frame movable body LED9f for illuminating the front of the above-frame movable body 132SG101 and the above-frame decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R.

In this way, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 can move vertically between the origin position shown in FIG. 44(A) and the performance position shown in FIG. 44(B) at the upper front part of the opening and closing door frame 3a (above the glass window). In addition, the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R can be changed between a non-deployed state in which they are stored at the origin position on the left and right sides of the back surface of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and a deployed state in which they protrude so as to spread out to the performance positions on the upper left and right sides of the back surface, and change from the non-deployed state to the deployed state in response to the upward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and change from the deployed state to the non-deployed state in response to the downward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101.

As shown in FIG. 44, the chance button 631B is made of a cylindrical member with an operation surface formed on the top, and is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction relative to the base portion 600A formed on the top of the operation unit 600. In detail, the chance button 631B is movable in the vertical direction between an origin position (see FIG. 44(A)) where the operation surface protrudes slightly upward from the base portion 600A, and an operation detection position where the operation surface is lower than the origin position, and is biased upward so as to be constantly held in the origin position; when the player presses the button, it moves from the origin position to the operation detection position, and the pressing operation is detected by the button sensor 635B.

The chance button 631B can be moved vertically between an origin position (see FIG. 44A) and a presentation position where the operation surface is higher than the origin position, by a drive mechanism (not shown) including the advance/retract motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the advance/retract motor 635F to the chance button 631B. In other words, the chance button 631B can be changed by the advance/retract motor 635F between a first operable state in the origin position and a second operable state in the presentation position, and can be pressed up to the operation detection position in either the first operable state or the second operable state.

The chance button 631B is detected by an origin position sensor 635C at the origin position, by a button sensor 635B at the operation detection position, and by a protruding position sensor 635D at the performance position. In addition, multiple chance button LEDs 9g are provided inside, and these chance button LEDs 9g can illuminate the operation surface.

In this embodiment, the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2 is exemplified by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, and the frame-side movable body provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a is exemplified by the chance button 631B and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side movable body and the frame-side movable body are not limited to those described above, and the number, position, shape, and operation mode of each can be changed in various ways.

[Various performances]
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 45 to Fig. 46. Fig. 45 is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. Fig. 46 (A) is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during the variable display period of the SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 45, the performance control CPU 120 can execute multiple performances. In detail, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "pre-reading movable object forecast" that suggests the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display (also called a target change) that is the subject of the pre-reading forecast before that variable display starts.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "start-time announcement," a "pseudo consecutive announcement," a "moving object announcement," a "reach announcement," and a "button announcement" as advance announcements that indicate that the variable display will be controlled to a jackpot.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a "win/lose button presentation" as a deciding presentation that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in a variable display based on a super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, SP reach A to E, etc.).

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute the following jackpot presentations during a jackpot game state: a fanfare presentation, a round presentation, a promotion presentation, and an ending presentation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute "time-saving performance" and "result performance" as time-saving performances that can be executed in the special states of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a "customer waiting demo presentation" as a standby presentation that can be executed in a standby state where no game is being played.

As shown in FIG. 46(A), the "Start Notice", "Movable Object Notice/Pseudo Consecutive Notice", and "Reach Notice/Button Notice" are effects that can be executed, for example, before the variable display mode becomes the N reach mode and the N reach effect is executed, or before the variable display mode becomes the SP reach mode and the SP reach effect is executed. In addition, the "Win/Loss Button Effect" is an effect that can be executed in the latter half of the SP reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the "fanfare effect" is executed during the fanfare period from when the control of the jackpot game state starts until the start of the round game in which the large prize opening is opened, the "round effect" is executed during the period in which the opening control of the large prize opening is executed during the round game in which the large prize opening is repeatedly opened and closed, the "interval effect" is executed during the period in which the closing control of the large prize opening is executed during the round game, and the "ending effect" is executed during the ending period from when the round game ends until the jackpot game state ends. These fanfare period, round game period, and ending period are periods managed by the CPU 103. In addition, in the first round of jackpots C, D, and E, the large prize opening is opened in a small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time).

The "promotion effect" is also executed during the special round interval period from the end of the third round opening period of the large prize entry port in jackpots C, D, and E until the start of the fourth round opening period.

(Pre-reading moving object notice)
As shown in Figure 45, the "pre-reading movable body announcement" is an effect in which an on-board movable body 32A operates in multiple variable displays corresponding to pending memories that were not the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect, which is executed before the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) of the pending memory that was the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect is executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(A1), if a start winning occurs when the number of reserved memories for the first special pattern is "2" and a variable display is being executed, and a decision is made to execute a pre-reading movable body announcement based on the fact that the variable display based on the reserved memory prior to the start winning is a non-reach miss (i.e., the special pattern change time is 12 seconds or less), then after the variable display is stopped (see FIG. 47(A2)), when the reserved memory is consumed and the variable display is started, the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the effect display 132SG401 emphasizing the on-board movable body 32A is displayed and a sound effect is output (see FIG. 47(A3)), and then it returns to the origin position before the variable display is stopped (see FIG. 47(A4)). This action is performed when the variable display that is executed before the start of the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-reading preview performance is started, and when the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-reading preview performance is started (see Figures 47 (A5) to (A7)).

In this embodiment, the pre-reading movable body announcement is an example of a presentation pattern in which the pre-reading movable body announcement continues across multiple variable displays until the target change begins, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a presentation pattern with a low expectation level in which the pre-reading movable body announcement ends before the target change begins may be executed. In addition, multiple presentation patterns with different jackpot expectations may be executed depending on the moving speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(Announcement at the start)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "start notice" is an effect that indicates whether the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display starts. The display color of the active display 132SG003 is set to white as a standard color and can be changed to blue, green, and red, and the display color at the end of the start notice indicates the probability of a big win. In this embodiment, a presentation pattern that ends with white, a presentation pattern that ends with blue, a presentation pattern that ends with green, and a presentation pattern that ends with red are executable, and the presentation patterns with the highest probability of a big win are white, blue, green, and red, in that order.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B1), when it is decided to execute a start-up notice with the start of the variable display, the entire display area is turned off or becomes dark with low brightness, and the character display 132SG402 "!!" is displayed approximately in the middle of the display area (see FIG. 48 (B2)). Next, the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white and become bright (see FIG. 48 (B3)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or enlarge, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), the character display 132SG403 with a question mark is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be white (see Figure 48 (B3a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in blue, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged (see FIG. 48 (B4)), and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white in FIG. 48 (B3), the active display 132SG003 breaks and the character display 132SG404 "!?" is displayed, notifying the user that the final display color will be blue (see FIG. 48 (B4a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in green, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually changes from white to blue to green in that order and are enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) (B5)), and then when a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), the active display 132SG003 breaks and the word "heat" 132SG405 is displayed, notifying the user that the final display color will be green (see Figure 48 (B5a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in red, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually changes from white, blue, green, and red in that order while being enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) to (B6)), and then when a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 was displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), the text display 132SG406 saying "Super Hot" is displayed above the active display 132SG003, notifying the user that the final display color will be red (see Figure 48 (B6a)).

In this way, the "start notice" includes an introductory part that is a period during which the user is aroused as to whether or not the hold display will change (see FIG. 48 (B2) to (B6)), and a result notification part that is a period during which the user is notified of the result of the hold display change (see FIG. 48 (B3a), (B4a), (B5a), (B6a)).

In this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot is suggested by changing the display mode such as the display color and size of the active display 132SG003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the expected probability of a jackpot may be suggested by changing a display mode other than the display color and size. Also, the expected probability of a jackpot may be suggested by changing the display mode of not only the active display 132SG003, but also the first pending display 132SG001 and the second pending display 132SG002. Also, the change patterns of the display color and size are not limited to those described above, and other change patterns may be executable.

(Movable object preview)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "movable object notice" is a presentation in which the movable object 32A on the board vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the middle position and the chance button 631B vibrates before the pseudo consecutive presentation described later is executed in the variable display. The presentation patterns of the movable object notice include a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the vertical vibration amplitude is small, and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the vertical vibration amplitude is larger than the vibration (small) and the expectation of a big win is high. Depending on the variable display result, either non-execution, a "vibration (small) pattern" or a "vibration (large) pattern" is determined.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (C1), when the execution of a movable object announcement is decided with the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the pseudo consecutive performance starts, the movable object 32A on the board vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the middle position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see FIG. 49 (C2)). In addition, an effect display 132SG407 emphasizing the movable object 32A on the board is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and performance sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a movable object prediction is executed in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movable object prediction may also be executed in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is not executed (for example, a non-reach variable pattern).

In addition, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (pattern A) before the start of the operation of the chance button 631B in the initial operation described later, or together with the advance operation. In addition, as a performance during the change, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (pattern B) to indicate the degree of expectation, or to operate the vibration motor 635E (pattern C) as a decoration (liven up) when a jackpot is hit or when the movable body is moving. Each of these patterns A, B, and C has a different vibration mode (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, and movement time), as well as a different lamp mode (pattern A: initial emphasis, pattern B: high-speed white flashing, high-speed red flashing, pattern C: rainbow color, lighting in a color corresponding to the effect displayed when the movable body is moving) and sound output mode (pattern A: initialization notification or no sound, pattern B: background music during change, pattern C: congratulatory sound at the time of the jackpot, movable body performance sound).

As described below, the initial highlight mode is a lighting pattern (brightness, lighting time, etc.) that is dedicated to the initial action, and is therefore a lighting pattern that is not used in any performance action control (see Figure 56 (B)).

(Pseudo consecutive announcement)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is a presentation that suggests whether or not the variable display will resume after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, that is, whether or not one variable display will be pseudo-shown as multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive presentation includes a double pattern in which the variable display is resumed twice, and a triple pattern in which the variable display is resumed three times and has a higher chance of winning than the double pattern, and either the double pattern or the triple pattern is determined depending on the variable display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(C1), when a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed is started, if it is decided to execute a movable object prediction, the movable object prediction is executed (see FIG. 49(C2)). After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 49(C3)), and after a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 49(C4)), a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is decelerated and displayed just before the stop display position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 49(C5)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 49 (C6)), and then the variable display of the decorative patterns is resumed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 49 (C7)). On the other hand, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and a variable display result of a miss is displayed (see FIG. 49 (C10)).

In addition, in FIG. 49 (C7), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo consecutive announcement of a double pattern, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily displayed as stopped (see FIG. 49 (C8)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see FIG. 49 (C9)), and progressing to an SP reach performance.In addition, in FIG. 49 (C7), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo consecutive announcement of a triple pattern, the flow of FIG. 49 (C3) to (C7) is repeated, and then in FIG. 49 (C8) and (C9), the reach mode is reached, and progressing to an SP reach performance.

In this way, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" includes an introductory part that is a period to tease whether or not the variable display will resume (see Fig. 49 (C3) to (B5)), and a result notification part that is a period to notify the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed (see Fig. 49 (C6), (C10), (C9)).

(Reach notice)
As shown in Figure 45, the "reach preview" is a presentation that indicates whether or not a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun and the decorative pattern that was displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is then displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, in other words, whether or not a reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (D1), after the variable display is started, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed stationary (see FIG. 50 (D2)), and then, before the stationary display position in the variably displayed right decorative pattern display area 5R, the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is started (see FIG. 50 (D3)). Then, when the operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation effective period after the deceleration display is started, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has elapsed, if the reach state is not reached, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L passes the stationary display position and the next decorative pattern is displayed stationary (see FIG. 50 (D4), (D5), (D7)), and if the reach state is reached, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed stationary at the stationary display position (see FIG. 50 (D4), (D5), (D6)).

The reach mode is a mode (also called a reach performance) in which, from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols (e.g., the left and right symbols) excluding one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) from the combination of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that make up the jackpot display result are displayed stationary, and then the one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is displayed variably.

(Button Preview)
As shown in Figure 45, when the above-mentioned reach prediction is executed, the "button prediction" is executed from the time when the decelerating display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L begins in the right decorative pattern display area 5R until a specified operation valid period has elapsed, and is a presentation that promotes button operation to determine whether or not a reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Fig. 50 (D4) to (D5), this is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the chance button 631B from when the deceleration display of the decorative pattern begins until a predetermined effective operation period has elapsed, and begins with the display of an operation promotion display and a button image imitating the chance button 631B, and ends when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the effective operation period, or when no operation is detected and the effective operation period has elapsed, with the operation promotion display and button image no longer displayed.

The presentation patterns (operation promotion modes) of the button announcement include a "long press pattern" that encourages the player to press and hold the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, a "continuous hit pattern" that encourages the player to repeatedly hit the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, and a "single hit pattern" that encourages the player to press the chance button 631B once. Depending on the variable display result, either non-execution, "long press pattern," "continuous hit pattern," or "single hit pattern" is determined. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set. The operation promotion display is "Long press!" in the "long press pattern," "continuous hit!" in the "continuous hit pattern," and "Press!" in the "single hit pattern."

In this way, the "button announcement" includes an operation promotion part that serves as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 50 (D5)), and a result notification part that serves as a period for notifying the user of the result of whether or not the operation has resulted in a reach state (see FIG. 50 (D6) and (D7)).

(Win/lose button effect)
As shown in Figure 45, the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" is a presentation that prompts the user to operate a button to determine whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot at the end of the SP Reach presentation in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern, and notifies the user of the result of whether or not it will be a jackpot.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E1), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, a reach title, which is a type of SP reach performance, is announced, and the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 51 (E2) and (E3)), and then, from the timing when the battle is concluded until a predetermined effective operation period has elapsed, an operation prompting display 132SG411 consisting of the characters "PRESS!!" to prompt the operation of the chance button 631B, and a button display 132SG412 imitating the chance button 631B are displayed (see FIG. 51 (E4)).

When the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 132SG411 and the button display 132SG412 are hidden and the game ends. When the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 9e is lit in a predetermined light color while the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, the effect display 132SG413 that emphasizes the underboard movable body 32B is displayed and a predetermined performance sound effect is output, and it is announced that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 51 (E5)). After that, an image (not shown) indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, and then the combination of jackpot confirmation patterns is displayed to announce that a jackpot has been achieved (see FIG. 51 (E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and a display 132SG414 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle against the enemy character, after which it is announced that the variable display result is a miss (see Figure 51 (E10) to (E12)).

The possible presentation patterns are one in which the operation prompt display is displayed while the chance button 631B remains in the origin position, and one in which the chance button 631B moves from the origin position to the presentation position and the operation prompt display is displayed, with a higher chance of winning than when the chance button 631B is in the origin position. The presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

In this way, the "win/lose button effect" includes an operation promotion part that serves as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 51 (E4)), and a result notification part that serves as a period for notifying the user of the variable display result of whether or not the result is a jackpot by the under-board movable body 32B (see FIG. 51 (E5) and (E10)).

(Fanfare performance)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "fanfare effect" is an effect that notifies information about the controlled jackpot during the period from when the jackpot game state is controlled to when the round game starts. The information about the jackpot is, for example, information about the jackpot type, the number of rounds, the number of balls dispensed, the game state after the jackpot ends (time-saving state A, B, C1, C2), and the like, and may include other information.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F1), when the jackpot confirmed symbol combination is stopped and the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the jackpot game state starts, and the display 132SG420 indicating that the jackpot has started is displayed (see FIG. 52 (F2)). Also, when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 54 (A1) and (A2), the frame-top movable body 132SG101 rises from the origin position to the performance position, and after the jackpot game state ends, it is maintained in the performance position until the time-saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the type of jackpot (jackpot A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 that constitutes "BIG BONUS!!" is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (for example, one character) and moved to the center of the display screen (see Figure 52 (F3) to (F6)). In addition, in the case of a 3-round jackpot, the character image that constitutes "SMALL BONUS!!" is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (for example, one character) and moved to the center of the display screen (not shown).

Next, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the presentation position and displays a right-hit promotion display 132SG431 that encourages the player to shoot the game ball into the right game area (see FIG. 52 (F7)), after which the on-board movable body 32A returns to the origin position and displays a right-hit promotion display 132SG432, which indicates that the player should aim for the big prize slot (see FIG. 52 (F8)).

In this way, the "fanfare effect" includes an introductory part that serves as a period during which information regarding a jackpot is announced (see FIG. 52 (F2) to (F6)), and an operation direction announcement part that announces the operation direction of the ball-hitting control handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right (see FIG. 52 (F7) and (F8)).

(Round performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "round performance" is a performance in which winning information during a round is announced during a round of play when the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state after the fanfare period ends and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F9) to (F11), during a round of play, a character display 132SG450, a round number display 132SG451 indicating the number of rounds, a winning ball number display 132SG452 indicating the number of winning balls in that round of play, a ball number display 132SG453 indicating the number of balls paid out from the start of the jackpot game state to the present time, a consecutive jackpot count/total ball number display 132SG454 indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls paid out during the jackpot count, and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 promoting right-hit operation are displayed.

If a jackpot occurs during the time-saving mode, the "Aim for the V!!" effect shown in FIG. 40 (C2) is executed in the operation direction notification part of FIG. 52 (F8). The "Aim for the V!!" effect also continues during the round effect period of FIG. 52 (F9).

The images displayed in the round presentation may be moving images, and each round may be a picture-story presentation in which an explanatory presentation of a character, an explanatory presentation of "FINAL BATTLE", or a story is presented. For example, if an explanatory presentation of character A is presented in the first round, an explanatory presentation of character B is presented in the second round, but if the power is restored after a power outage in the middle of the first round, a "restoration in progress" message is displayed until the first round ends, and then when the second round begins, the explanatory presentation of character A that was presented in the first round is presented again. In the event of a power outage, the presentation control CPU 120 does not remember what was displayed before the power outage, so by displaying it from the beginning in the second round, consideration can be given to players who want to see the explanatory presentation of character A until the end.

In addition, in the round performance, a PV performance according to the selected song may be performed. For example, if a PV performance (up to the chorus) according to the selected song A was performed in the first round, if there is no change in the song, a PV performance (chorus part) according to the selected song A will continue to be performed in the second round, but if the power is cut off in the middle of the first round, when the power is restored, a recovery display will be displayed (and there will be no sound) until the first round ends, and then, when the second round starts, a PV performance (A melody) according to the selected song A will be performed again. Also, if the selected song A is changed to the selected song B in the first round, a PV performance according to the selected song B will be performed in the first round, and then, a PV performance according to the selected song B will continue to be performed in the second round, but if the power is cut off in the middle of the first round, when the power is restored, a recovery display will be displayed (and there will be no sound) until the first round ends, and then, when the second round starts, a PV performance according to the selected song A will be performed. In the event of a power outage, the presentation control CPU 120 does not remember what was displayed before the power outage, so in the second round, a PV presentation corresponding to the default selected song A can be performed (for example, if the ball output display "150" is displayed during one round of play, when power is restored after a power outage, the ball output display displayed during the next round of play will be "0").

(Promotional performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "promotion effect" is a round promotion effect that notifies whether or not the round play will continue (round promotion) during the round interval in the third round play of jackpots C to E in which the variable display result of the second special pattern has become a jackpot display result, that is, whether or not the jackpot will be promoted to jackpots D or E (10 rounds), which have a greater number of rounds than jackpot C (3 rounds)).

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (F21), the background image is switched to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the planned ball number counter display 132SG351, which indicates the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, are displayed, and the promotion effect begins.

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball number display 132SG353 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 132SG351 (see FIG. 53 (F22)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button display 132SG354 imitating the chance button 631B, an operation prompting display 132SG355 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 132SG356 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect is executed to encourage a single press of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 53 (F23)).

Next, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the pressing operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the movable body 32B below the board rises from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 53 (F24)), the friendly character attacks, the counter value of the planned ball number counter display 132SG351 is displayed variably (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 59 (F25)). Then, the planned ball number counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a specified counter value (for example, "1500", which is the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "10R jackpot") is displayed as a stop, and it is announced that the jackpot has been promoted to a 10 round jackpot (see FIG. 53 (F26)).

In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when the pressing of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, an image (not shown) is displayed in which the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position and the enemy character is not defeated, and it is announced that it was not a 10-round jackpot, in other words, that promotion to a 10-round jackpot has failed (see FIG. 53 (F27)).

In this way, the "promotion effect" includes an introductory part that provokes the question of whether or not the player will be promoted (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)), and a result notification part that notifies the player of the result of whether or not the player has been promoted (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F27)).

(Ending performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "ending presentation" is a presentation in which the end of the jackpot is announced and information about the game state that will be controlled after the end of the jackpot is announced.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F12) to (F14), if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round of play ends, a notification is displayed that the "FINAL BATTLE presentation" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state A will be set), and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed, indicating to the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area and aim for the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot B, when the third round of play is completed, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state C1 will be controlled) (see Fig. 52 (F32), (F34)). In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when the promotion effect (promotion failure) ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B will be controlled) (see Fig. 53 (F32), (F34)). In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the ninth round of play is completed, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B or time-saving state C1 will be controlled) (see Fig. 53 (F32), (F34)).

In this way, the "ending performance" includes an introduction part as an introductory period (see FIG. 52 (F12) and FIG. 53 (F31)), a time-saving state notification part in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified (see FIG. 52 (F13) and FIG. 53 (F32) and (F34)), and an operation direction notification part in which the operation direction of the ball-hitting operation handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right, is notified (see FIG. 52 (F14)).

(Performance during time-saving)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "time-saving effect" is an effect that notifies the user that a "FINAL BATTLE effect" or a "BATTLE RUSH effect" is being executed, that is, that the device is being controlled to a time-saving state (see FIGS. 38 and 40).

(Results Production)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "Result Presentation" is a presentation that notifies the player that the "FINAL BATTLE Presentation" or the "BATTLE RUSH Presentation" has ended, that is, that the control of the time-saving state has ended (see Figs. 39 and 40). Also, when the game state is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state, as shown in Figs. 54 (B1) and (B2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 descends from the presentation position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position.

(Waiting for customers demo performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "waiting for customers demo effect" is an effect that notifies the user that the machine is in a waiting for customers (waiting to play) state, and is initiated when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of a waiting for customers demo designation command output from the main board 11 without the reception of a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (G1), when the power is turned on and the initial operation is started in the initial operation control process, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed when the initial operation is completed (see FIG. 55 (G2)) (see FIG. 55 (G3)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on in FIG. 55 (G1) without any variable display, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is hidden and a customer waiting demo performance is started (see FIG. 55 (G4)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after a moving image is displayed that sequentially introduces the multiple friendly characters A to D (enemy character images may be included) that appear in various performances and the contents of the content (see FIG. 55 (G4) to (G7)), the image of friendly characters A to D gathered together is still displayed (see FIG. 55 (G8)), the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises to the origin position (see FIG. 55 (G9) to (G10)), and the first background display 132SG310 showing a daytime city corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the performance ends (see FIG. 55 (G11)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G12)).

When a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed multiple times repeatedly in the standby state, or may not be performed after it has been performed a predetermined number of times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the form in which the various effects shown in FIG. 45 can be executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than those described above may be executed. Furthermore, the performance mode of each effect can be changed in various ways, and the effect may be executed in a mode other than those described above.

[Initial Operation Control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the sound will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 (A) is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the lamp and sound modes according to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in FIG. 56 (A), the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing initial operation control that causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to perform their initial operation (initial operation) when the power is turned on (during cold start processing or hot start processing), and performance operation control that causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to operate in a manner appropriate to the performance during various performances.

"Initial motion control" includes "origin placement control (short initial motion control)" which includes non-detection motion control that returns the movable body to the origin position when it is located other than the origin position, and non-detection motion control that moves the movable body away from the origin position when it is located at the origin position and returns it to the origin position from that position away, and "motion confirmation control (long initial motion control)" which is a confirmation motion to confirm that the movable body is operating normally, in which the movable body is moved from the origin position to the performance position and then moved from the performance position to the origin position.

In more detail, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the initial operation process and the movable body is not detected by the origin position sensor, that is, when the movable body is in a position other than the origin position (for example, a specified position between the origin position and the performance position) for some reason (for example, when the movable body has moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the play island, when the movable body could not be returned to the origin during the previous operation (for example, when an operation error (operation abnormality) occurs during the execution of the performance, such as when the motor is out of step, malfunctions, or gets stuck, and the movable body cannot be confirmed to be returned to the origin or cannot operate), or when the movable body has moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine), the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control to return the movable body to the origin position. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable body is in a position away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable body toward the origin position.

In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 detects a movable body by the origin position sensor when executing the initial operation process, it executes detection-time operation control. For example, in cases where a predetermined operable range (e.g., play) is set between the time the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time the movement of the movable body toward the origin position is restricted so that the movable body is reliably detected by the origin detection sensor, the movable body may return to the origin and stop at a position further back than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection-time operation control is executed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

This detection operation control requires that the movable body be moved away from the origin position to temporarily release the detection state by the origin position sensor, and then returned to the origin position. However, since there is no need to move it to the performance position, the movable body is moved from the origin position to a detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. In other words, it is made to perform a reciprocating motion over a shorter distance than the long initial motion.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control in the initial operation process, and then executes operation confirmation control processing. Since the operation confirmation control processing is an operation control for confirming that the movable bodies are operating normally, it is an operation control that moves each movable body from its respective origin position to the performance position farthest from the origin position, and then returns it to the origin position. In other words, the movement to the performance position is the maximum advancement operation. In addition, the operation confirmation control processing of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B is the same as the performance operation controls 3 and 4 described below, but the operation confirmation control processing of each movable body does not necessarily have to be the same as any of the performance operation controls.

"Performance operation control" refers to the operation control of movable bodies in various performances, and includes multiple types of operation control with different types of target movable bodies and different operation modes. In more detail, 1. "Prediction" is an operation control that vibrates the movable body 32A on the board up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position before the target fluctuation such as pre-prediction movable body announcement begins. 2. "The relevant" is an operation control that vibrates the movable body 32A on the board up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position in the relevant fluctuation such as movable body announcement, and vibrates the chance button 631B by the vibration motor 635E. 3. "Big hit notification, round promotion, V promotion" is an operation control that moves the movable body 32B below the board from the origin position to the performance position in big hit notification, round promotion, V promotion, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 4. "Fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo performance" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position in fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo performance, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 5. "Big hit game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the big hit game state. 6. "Normal game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal game state. 7. "Operation promotion" is an operation control that moves the chance button 631B from the origin position to the performance position in the win/lose button performance.

In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as short initial operation control, it controls the moving body so that it always operates at a single (constant) operating speed based on the minimum control speed (low speed) set in the operation confirmation control. Note that these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the moving body, and are not common operating speeds when there are multiple moving bodies, so the minimum speed for each moving body may be different.

Specifically, the first movable body and the other second movable body differ in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor, so even if the same control speed is set, the actual operating speed of the movable body differs. Also, even if a different control speed is set for each movable body, the actual operating speed of the movable body differs. In this way, the minimum speed is an operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and the movable body is controlled to operate at the optimal minimum speed, so it is possible to reliably detect multiple movable bodies with different modes at the origin position.

In addition, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control when performing a movable body performance in which a movable body is operated in various performances such as the pre-reading performance, advance notice performance, deciding performance, and jackpot performance shown in FIG. 45), so the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum speed in the performance operation control. However, as long as it is possible to check whether or not the movable body is operating normally, the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in the performance operation control do not necessarily have to be the same.

(Operation check control (long initial operation control))
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing.

As shown in FIG. 57(A), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts (when the power is turned on), if the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (cold start process) of step S6 in the game control main process, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a predetermined startup preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Then, when a power-on command is received from the main board 11 after a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) has elapsed since the power was turned on, an initialization notification is started to indicate that the cold start process has been performed, and when a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) has elapsed since the initialization notification was started, the initial operation control of the movable bodies (the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, and the movable body on the frame 132SG101) is started (see FIG. 57(B)). In the initialization notification, as described later, each lamp (frame LED 9a, 9b, the movable body on the board LED 9d, the movable body below the board LED 9e, the movable body on the frame LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) starts to light up in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a predetermined initialization notification sound (see FIG. 61).

In the initial operation control, first, a short initial operation control is performed for each movable body (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101), and then an operation confirmation control is performed. In the following, illustrations of the operation modes based on the short initial operation control will be omitted, and only the operation modes based on the operation confirmation control will be described.

In the operation confirmation control, first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(B)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(D)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(E)). Next, the under-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), and then the on-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(G)). Next, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), and then the board-bottom movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends, and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends.

In this way, in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation of each movable body is started in the order of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, since the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with part of the initial operation period of the chance button 631B, and the initial operation control of the above-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with part of the initial operation period of the below-board movable body 32B, the operation confirmation control period of multiple movable bodies can be shortened.

In addition, when the initial motion control of one movable body is being performed while the motion control of another movable body is being performed, while one movable body (e.g., chance button 631B, below-board movable body 32B) is stopped at the performance position, the other movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A, above-frame movable body 132SG101) moves to the performance position or the origin position, so that even when the initial motion control of two or more movable bodies is being performed in parallel, the motion of each movable body can be confirmed.

In addition, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing was explained above based on Figure 57. However, in the operation confirmation control during hot start processing, initialization notification using a lamp and sound is not performed, but the operation confirmation control is performed for the movable body in the same manner as during cold start processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during operation confirmation control flashes "red" during cold start processing (during initialization notification), is "off" during hot start processing (during recovery), and is lit "in a manner corresponding to the background image" during hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during performance operation control is lit "in a manner corresponding to the background image". Note that the background image (background display) is, for example, background images A and B, and when background image A is displayed and power is lost and then restored, background image A is always displayed, and the lamp is always illuminated in a manner corresponding to background image A.

In addition, the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position and during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position in the operation confirmation control is lit in "white" during cold start processing (initialization notification), hot start processing (recovery), and hot start processing (variable display stopped). On the other hand, in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control of the under-board movable body 32B in the win/lose button performance), the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position is lit in a first light-emitting mode (for example, a rainbow flash mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are lit in sequence at predetermined intervals with off in between), while the movable body LED of the movable body during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position is lit in a second light-emitting mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are lit in sequence at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the operation mode of each movable body is common to the operation confirmation control and the presentation operation control, the movable body LED of each movable body emits light in the same manner (white lighting) for the advancing operation and the retreating operation in the operation confirmation control (the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode are the same), while it emits light in different manners (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) for the advancing operation and the retreating operation in the presentation operation control (the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode are different), so it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 1 that makes it easy to distinguish whether the operation confirmation control or the presentation operation control is being performed. In particular, in the operation confirmation control, the light emission color and lighting mode do not always change, such as in the case of a rainbow flash or smooth rainbow, making it easier to check the operation of the movable body.

Note that in FIG. 56(B), rainbow flash and smooth rainbow are shown as examples of the first and second light emission modes of the movable body LED in the performance operation control, but these light emission modes may be different depending on the type of performance.

In addition, the light emission brightness during operation confirmation control is lower than the light emission brightness during performance operation control, which reduces power consumption when the power is turned on and reduces the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the brightness of the movable body LED is set to a low brightness, preventing the movable body's operation from being difficult to confirm due to glare.

Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), during cold start processing in the operation confirmation control (during initialization notification), a predetermined initialization notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R over the initialization notification period. The predetermined initialization notification sound is a sound that indicates that initialization notification is being performed, and is a different sound from the performance sound effects output in other performance operation controls. Also, during hot start processing (during recovery or variable display stopped), no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R (silent).

The menu/volume and light adjustment indication suggestion display 132SG480 (see FIG. 55 (G3)) is displayed during the valid operation period during which menu display and volume and light adjustment operations are validly accepted, and by operating the selection button 132SG35 while the menu/volume and light adjustment indication suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed, it is possible to display a specified menu screen (not shown) or adjust the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g.

In this embodiment, during the execution period of the operation confirmation control (during cold start processing or hot start processing), the menu display and the volume/light intensity adjustment are not controlled during the effective operation period, so even if the light intensity adjustment operation is performed using the selection button 132SG35 during the operation confirmation control, the light intensity of the various lamps 9a to 9g does not change and they continue to emit light at the brightness during execution. More specifically, during the operation confirmation control, the brightness of the movable body that is operating while emitting light in "white" (initial highlighting mode) at "low brightness" cannot be adjusted.

In addition, during hot start processing, it may be possible to adjust the volume and light intensity while the operation check control is being executed, allowing the player to quickly play in an environment that suits their preferences.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is not possible to display a menu or adjust the volume and light intensity during the execution period of the operation confirmation control, but after the operation confirmation control ends, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed, so that if the selection button 132SG35 is operated during the operation confirmation control, it is possible to check whether or not the brightness has been adjusted by that operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a command to specify the start of a big win or a command to specify the opening of a big prize slot is received during the period in which the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the display of a fanfare effect or a round effect may be started in a display layer lower than the recovery display 132SG510, and when the start preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, the display of the fanfare effect or the round effect may be made visible partway through in the lower layer.

In addition, when a command to specify whether to start a jackpot or a command to specify whether the jackpot is opening during a jackpot is received during the display period of the start preparation display 132SG500, the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed until the next command (a command related to the start of a round of play) is received.

As shown in Figures 58 to 60, power outages may occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at various times, such as when the variable display is stopped and the machine is in a game standby state, when the variable display is being executed, and when a jackpot game is being executed. Although not shown in detail, at any time when a power outage occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may start up with a cold start process or a hot start process, but the operating state of each movable body, the light emission state of each movable body LED, background sound, etc. may differ depending on the time when the power outage occurred.

[Initial operation control during cold start and hot start]
Next, a description will be given of a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start and a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start. Note that, for a hot start, a description will be given of a case where the gaming state is in a normal state.

Mode 1 (Initial operation control during cold start)
As shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is started on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed from the start of the display of the start preparation display 132SG500, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 has received the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in the initialization notification mode from the reception timing of the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, and the output of the initialization notification sound is started from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in this feature section 132SG light up to indicate initialization, and then turn off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, background image command, or customer waiting demo command. After that, they repeatedly light up in red (light up) and turn off.

Then, 2 seconds (2000 ms) after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command from the CPU 103, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the background image during the variable display stop corresponding to the normal state starts instead of the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After this, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 starts as the initial operation control.

First, when the chance button 631B starts moving from the origin position to the presentation position 4 seconds after the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends (6 seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button LED 9g starts emitting light (white light) in the initial highlight mode from the start of the moving forward motion. When the chance button 631B moves to the presentation position, the chance button 631 stays at the presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After staying there for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B moves to move away from the presentation position to the origin position. The chance button LED 9g stops emitting light in the initial highlight mode at the end of the moving away motion of the chance button 631, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode (see Figures 63 (A) to (C)).

In addition, from the end of the advancement motion of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A starts to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A starts to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts to emit light in the initial highlighting mode (white light) from the start of the advancement motion. Then, after the specified period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A executes a retreat motion from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retreat motion of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to illumination in the initialization notification mode.

In addition, from the end of the retreat operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in the initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of dwell, the below-board movable body 32B executes the retreat operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the retreat operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and returns to illumination in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the over-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in the initial highlight mode (illuminated in white) while the over-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The light emission in the initial highlight mode of the over-frame movable body LED 9f ends at the end timing of the retreat motion of the over-frame movable body 132SG101 and returns to light emission in the initialization notification mode.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a cold start in this characteristic part 132SG ends when 20 seconds (20,000 ms) have elapsed since the start of the advancement operation of the chance button 631B. Furthermore, after the operation (check operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, when 4 seconds (4000 ms) have elapsed from the timing of the completion of the operation (check operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g end their illumination in the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all initial operation control ends. In other words, the initial operation control at a cold start in this characteristic part 132SG is a control that is executed for 30 seconds (30,000 ms).

Here, we will explain the case where a start winning occurs after the initial operation control, and a variable display is started in which a movable body prediction is executed based on the start winning. First, as shown in FIG. 61, after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). Also, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state where sound output is stopped.

When a start winning occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R start to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period when the movable object prediction is being performed, an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction is displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the example shown in Figure 61, the movable object prediction includes displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, vibration of the chance button 631B, output of a sound (movable object prediction sound) corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R, and illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable object prediction may include only displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, and reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position. In addition, the movable object prediction may include displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, as well as one or more of the following: vibration of the chance button 631B, output of a sound (movable object prediction sound) corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R, and illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction.

Next, we will explain the case where a start winning occurs during the initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on the start winning is started. First, as shown in FIG. 62, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is started from the timing of the start winning. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L, 8R start outputting background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

After the variable display starts, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the execution period of the movable body preview occurs during the initial operation control period of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, a movable body effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body preview, while the initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 continues to be executed (see Figures 63 (D) to (E)).

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination state of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlight state of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination state corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body preview in the variable display ends and the operation of all the movable bodies ends, the up and down movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the middle position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would have been executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, are executed from the timing when the operation ended (Figures 63 (F) to (J) and Figures 64 (K) to (L)). Note that while the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the speakers 8L and 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body preview (movable body preview sound) is output.

(Initial operation control during hot start)
As shown in Figures 65 and 66, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is started on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, and based on this, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state from the reception timing of the power recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command. Note that from the reception timing of the power recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (silence).

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-under movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in this characteristic section 132SG emit light in a color (e.g., white) corresponding to the normal state as an illumination corresponding to the background image in the normal state after the performance control CPU 120 has been turned off for one second from the timing of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the background image designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in the time-saving state (low probability high base state) or the probability variation state (high probability high base state), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-under movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g may emit light in a color or pattern different from that in the normal state as an illumination corresponding to the background image in the time-saving state or the probability variation state.

Then, 2 seconds (2000 ms) after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the background image during the variable display stop corresponding to the normal state starts instead of the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After this, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 starts as the initial operation control.

First, when the chance button 631B starts moving from the origin position to the presentation position 4 seconds after the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends (6 seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command are received), the chance button LED 9g starts emitting light in the initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the moving forward motion. When the chance button 631B moves to the presentation position, the chance button 631 stays at the presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After staying there for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B moves to move away from the presentation position to the origin position. The light emission of the chance button LED 9g in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the moving away motion of the chance button 631, and the chance button LED 9g changes to emitting light in the default mode (e.g., white light emission).

In addition, from the end of the advancement motion of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A starts to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A starts to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light) from the start of the advancement motion. Then, after the specified period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A executes a retreat motion from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retreat motion of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to illumination in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

In addition, from the end of the retreat operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in an initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the specified period of dwelling, the below-board movable body 32B executes the retreat operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the retreat operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and returns to illumination in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode (illuminated in white) while the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The light emission in the initial highlight mode of the above-frame movable body LED 9f ends at the end timing of the retreat operation of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to light emission in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 during a hot start in this characteristic part 132SG ends when 20 seconds (20,000 ms) have elapsed since the advancement operation of the chance button 631B began. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, unlike when it is started by a cold start, light is not emitted in the form of an initialization notification by the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, and an initialization notification sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For this reason, the initial operation control at a hot start in this feature part 132SG is a control in which the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are executed for 26 seconds, as shown in Figures 65 and 66.

Here, we will explain the case where a start winning occurs after the initial operation control, and a variable display is started in which a movable body prediction is executed based on the start winning. First, as shown in FIG. 65, after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output has been stopped (silent).

When a start winning occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R start to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period when the movable object prediction is being performed, an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction is displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, we will explain the case where a start winning occurs during the initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on the start winning is started. First, as shown in FIG. 66, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is started from the timing of the start winning. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L, 8R start outputting background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

After the variable display starts, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the execution period of the movable body preview occurs during the initial operation control period of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, the movable body effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body preview, while the initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 continues to be executed.

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination state of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlight state of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination state corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body preview in the variable display ends and the operation of all movable bodies ends (initial operation control ends), the up and down movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would have been executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, are executed from the timing when the operation ended. Note that while the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the speakers 8L and 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body preview (movable body preview sound) is output.

As described above, in this characteristic section 132SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the on-board movable body 32A (and the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B) are operated as initial operation control. Also, when a start-up winning occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction based on the start-up winning is started, if the execution period of the movable body prediction and the confirmation operation period overlap, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the movable body prediction are regulated as a performance operation of the movable body prediction. In addition, if a start win occurs during the confirmation operation when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction based on the start win is started, only the operation of the movable body 32A on the board is restricted as a performance operation of the movable body prediction.

By doing this, when a movable body prediction is executed with a variable display that is started during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial operation control, the initial operation control is not hindered by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a performance operation of the movable body prediction, and the player can be notified that the movable body prediction has been executed by the display of a movable body effect on the image display device 5 and by the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) according to the movable body prediction.

In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 66, the pachinko game machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including the execution of a movable body prediction is started with a hot start, and when the execution period of the movable body prediction occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including a deciding performance (i.e., a variable display of a jackpot) is started with a hot start, and when the execution period of the deciding performance occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the under-board movable body 32B as the deciding performance and the light emission (rainbow flash) of the under-board movable body LED9e in a mode according to the deciding performance may be restricted during the execution period of the deciding performance. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the under-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial operation or as a deciding performance based on the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED9e.

In addition, in this characteristic section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 30, an example is given in which the presentation control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start timing of the variable display to place each movable body at its respective origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and variable display based on the start winning is started, the initial operation of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. In this way, it is possible to prevent the initial operation of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

In addition, in this characteristic section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 30, an example is given in which the performance control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start timing of the customer waiting demo performance to place each movable body at its respective origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the start winning is started, and then the variable display ends during the initial operation period, and a customer waiting demo performance starts in response to the end of the variable display, the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body may be executed with priority over the operation of each movable body to its origin position. In this way, it is possible to prevent the operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body from being interrupted by the operation of each movable body to its origin position.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 1)
In addition, in this characteristic section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the operation of the movable body as the initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body prediction overlaps with the operation period of the movable body, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and after the initial operation control is ended, the operation of the movable body that is the target of the movable body prediction (in the case of this characteristic section 132SG, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B), the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, and 9c are displayed. b. An example has been given of a form in which light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview by the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 67, even if a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the operation of a movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the target movable body (the above-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, if the control period of the initial operation (operation control of each movable body and illumination of each LED in an initialization notification mode, and output of an initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R) ends during the execution period of the movable body preview, as shown in FIG. 67, from the timing when the control of the initial operation ends to the timing when the movable body preview ends, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the movable body preview, and a sound corresponding to the movable body preview may be output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As described above, during the control period of the initial operation, when the operation control of each movable body is terminated but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in accordance with the initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R continue to output the initialization notification sound, if a movable body announcement is executed, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board and the chance button 631B in accordance with the movable body announcement is executed, while the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g do not emit light in accordance with the movable body announcement mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in accordance with the movable body announcement, thereby making it possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect of the movable body announcement.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 2)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, a variable display is started to execute a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot. In this case, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), the display of the movable body effect on the image display device 5, the light emission of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are described. However, as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, a variable display is started to execute a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot. In the case where execution of a pre-reading movable body preview is decided due to multiple occurrences of variable display during the moving body confirmation operation, if the execution period of the pre-reading movable body preview overlaps with the confirmation operation period of each moving body or the period of initial operation control, during the execution period of the pre-reading movable body preview, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5, and the operation of the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B), the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f and chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the pre-reading movable body preview, and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the pre-reading movable body preview are not executed. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the subject of the pre-read movable body prediction is executed after the initial operation control is completed, during the execution period of the movable body prediction during the variable display, a movable body effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction, and sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction.

By doing this, even if the period for executing the pre-read movable object prediction occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable object, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A or the chance button 631B as the pre-read movable object prediction will not be executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by excessive operation of the on-board movable object 32A or the chance button 631B after the initial operation control has ended.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 3)
Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, an example has been given of a form in which a movable body prediction can be executed to move the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position as a presentation suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, a movable body prediction (second movable body prediction) can be executed again after a movable body prediction (first movable body prediction) as a presentation suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the rate at which the variable display result will be a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the movable body prediction is executed during the variable display (for example, the rate at which the variable display result will be a jackpot is higher when the second movable body prediction is executed in addition to the first movable body prediction than when only the first movable body prediction is executed).

In addition, in the case where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display in this manner, as shown in FIG. 69 as a modified example, when a start winning occurs during the initial motion control and a variable display that performs the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial motion control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement may be executed after the initial motion control ends (the first movable body announcement may be re-executed). However, if the second movable body announcement has already started during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the second movable body announcement being executed may be executed as a priority, and the first movable body announcement may not be re-executed, as shown in FIG. 69.

In this way, if the second movable body announcement is already being executed during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement is prioritized, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed even as the first movable body announcement, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect of the movable body announcement due to the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement being hindered by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the first movable body announcement.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, a form in which the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview can be executed during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview may be the same (for example, the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview are both performed in such a way that the on-board movable body 32A moves multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position), or the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview may be different (for example, the first movable body preview is performed in such a way that the on-board movable body 32A moves multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, while the second movable body is performed in such a way that the on-board movable body 32A moves multiple times between the origin position and the preview position).

(Initial Operation Control Modification 4)
Furthermore, in the case where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be executed during the variable display as shown in Figure 69, as a modified example, as shown in Figure 70, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, control may be performed so that the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed, while control may be performed so that only the second movable body announcement after the initial operation control is executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 71, when a start winning occurs after the initial operation control and a variable display is started to perform the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction based on the start winning, that is, when the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed as the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction during the variable display, if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A stops midway during the execution period of the first movable body prediction due to a loss of synchronism or the like, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be controlled to start as the second movable body prediction during the execution period of the second movable body prediction.

In this way, even if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the next movable body preview, the second movable body preview, is executed, so that the operation of the on-board movable body 32A can be retried.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 5)
In addition, in Figure 69, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body prediction overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body prediction can be executed after the initial operation control ends, while if the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction is within the execution period of the second movable body prediction, the execution of the second movable body prediction is prioritized and the first movable body prediction is not re-executed.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 72, in the case where the execution period of the second movable body prediction occurs during the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction, the re-execution of the first movable body prediction may be interrupted at the start of the execution period of the second movable body prediction, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as the second movable body prediction.

In this way, when the execution period of the second movable body announcement begins during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect caused by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement impeding the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 6)
In addition, in the characteristic section 132SG, an example has been given of a form in which the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position as an initial motion control, while the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and an intermediate position as a performance motion of the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-board movable body 32A may be operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial motion control and the performance motion of the movable body preview.

In addition, in the case where the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the performance operation of the movable body announcement, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation, the initial operation is continuously executed until the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123, whereas when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the performance operation of the movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be stopped according to the process data for the movable body announcement, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 73(A) and Fig. 73(B) as a modified example, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over the first period (1000 ms) by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the on-board movable body 32A being detected by the origin position sensor. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 on the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the performance position). Then, based on the on-board movable body 32A being detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124, the drive motor 132SG122 is driven in the reverse direction to operate the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. Furthermore, the reverse rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped on the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the origin position).

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 73 (B), for example, if a step-out occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position and the on-board movable body 32A stops between the origin position and the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 continues the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 beyond the first period because the performance position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A. At this time, if the performance position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period from the start of the initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction from the timing of the judgment of the operation error. Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.
Also, as shown in Figures 74(A) and 74(B), when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as a performance operation of the movable body notice, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data of the movable body notice to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a second period that is longer than the first period. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the performance position by stopping the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body notice. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124. Then, the performance control CPU 120 operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction based on the process data of the movable body notice while the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position by stopping the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body notice. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74(B), for example, if a step-out occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position and the on-board movable body 32A stops between the origin position and the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 continues to drive the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data of the movable body preview until the timing when the second period has elapsed. In other words, at the end timing of the second period, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body preview, regardless of whether or not the on-board movable body 32A has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124.

If the performance position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the second period from the start of the initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over a period of 6000 ms by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction from the timing of the determination of the operation error. Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

In this way, if a movable object prediction is executed during gameplay after the initial motion control has ended, even if the operation of the on-board movable object 32A corresponding to the movable object prediction is not performed normally, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as the initial motion control (confirmation operation) is not executed, making it possible to reduce the decrease in the presentation effect of the movable object prediction that was not performed normally.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 7)
In addition, in the above-mentioned variant example 6, an example was given of a form in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A when the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 as the initial operation control, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A as the initial operation control, it is possible to only display the effect on the image display device 5, light up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and output sound corresponding to the movable body announcement from the speakers 8L and 8R without operating the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body announcement execution period during the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75 as variant 7, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 1000 ms as initial operation control, and is also capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position toward the origin position over 2000 ms.

Furthermore, when the on-board movable body 32A stops between the performance position and the origin position as initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred and then can execute the initial operation control multiple times.

Here, if the performance control CPU 120 executes four initial motion controls and judges all of them to be errors, it stores the on-board movable body 32A as a motion-restricted movable body by the fourth initial motion control (dead end judgment). After that, the performance control CPU 120 operates the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position for 3000 ms as a special initial motion control, and then operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position for 6000 ms.

After that, when a start winning occurs and a variable display that executes a movable object prediction based on the start winning is started, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the on-board movable object 32A is stored as a movement-restricted movable object, does not operate the on-board movable object 32A during the movable object prediction execution period, and only displays effects on the image display device 5, lights up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputs sounds corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L, 8R.

As described above, by not operating the on-board movable body 32A that has been determined to be a dead end as a movable body preview, while displaying effects on the image display device 5, lighting up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputting sound corresponding to the movable body preview from the speakers 8L, 8R, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by operating the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body preview, while suppressing a decrease in the presentation effect of the movable body preview.

The configurations described in the above modified examples 1 to 7 may be added to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Alternatively, a part of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may be changed to at least one of the configurations of modified examples 1 to 7. In other words, modified examples 1 to 7 can be added to or changed to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment in any one of multiple modifications, or in a combination of multiple modifications.

Mode 2 (Initial operation control modification 8)
In addition, in the characteristic section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 16, when variable display is not executed, the CPU 103 outputs a customer waiting demo designation command to the presentation control board 12, thereby executing a customer waiting demo presentation on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 76, FIG. 77, and FIG. 78, in any of the cases where the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, where the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low probability low base state (normal state), and where the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a high base state (time-saving state), the presentation control CPU 120 may receive a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103 3000 ms after the start of the pachinko game machine 1, while the customer waiting demo presentation itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation has ended.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the customer waiting demo performance image (the demo movie shown in Figures 76, 77, and 78) displayed on the image display device 5 from being reduced due to the movable body (on-board movable body 32A) operating as the initial operation control obstructing the image.

Note that Figures 76, 77, and 78 show an example in which the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed may be set to 30 seconds or later, which is the period required for the initial operation of each movable body, thereby providing a sufficient period between the initial operation of each movable body and the customer waiting demo performance, and preventing the visibility of the customer waiting demo performance from being hindered.

Furthermore, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start. Regardless of whether the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start, the customer waiting demo performance may be executed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body, thereby preventing the customer waiting demo performance from being hindered by the movable body operating as the initial operation.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 9)
In the above-mentioned modified example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the performance control CPU 120 judges that the on-board movable body 32A is in a dead end state, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated as a movable body notice, but an effect is displayed on the image display device 5, LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are turned on, and sounds corresponding to the movable body notice are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 79 as variant example 9, if the performance control CPU 120 performs a dead end determination for the on-board movable body 32A, when the customer-waiting demo performance is executed after the special initial operation is completed, the on-board movable body 32A may not be operated, but effects corresponding to the customer-waiting demo performance may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be lit up in accordance with the customer-waiting demo performance.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent a breakdown caused by forcing the on-board movable body 32A to operate forcibly as part of a customer waiting demo performance in a situation where the on-board movable body 32A is not operating normally, while at the same time reducing the performance effect of the customer waiting demo performance.

Form 3 (power cut just before the big win fluctuation ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where the power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the big win fluctuation will be described with reference to Fig. 80. Fig. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the operation confirmation control in the case where the power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the big win fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 80, after the variable display based on the jackpot variable pattern is started, the combination of jackpot confirmation patterns is displayed statically in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends just before the variable display ends (for example, when the variable display is resumed and a re-lottery performance is executed after the combination of jackpot confirmation patterns is temporarily displayed, or during the pattern confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative patterns are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative patterns begins in the next variable display, approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), and then the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)). Although the jackpot variable display resumes, the variable display ends immediately and control of the jackpot game state begins.

Therefore, while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing, the power outage recovery command and the pattern determination command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received, and then the fanfare effect is started based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the jackpot start command.

In detail, until a predetermined time (e.g., about 1000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command and the pattern determination command were received, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g and the output of background sound (BGM) are restricted. In other words, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned off, and the background sound (BGM) is not output.

After that, when a jackpot start command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g light up in a manner corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) begins. In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the jackpot start command was received, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) begins. Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) is displayed as a black screen until a predetermined time (e.g., 1500 ms) has elapsed since its start.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the fanfare performance (introduction part) ends, and the fanfare performance (right hit notification part) starts.

As shown in Figures 52 (F7) and (F8), in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, right-hit promotion displays 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball into the right game area, and a right-hit operation promotion presentation is performed. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the right-hit notification part starts, the visibility of the right-hit notification part in the fanfare presentation, such as the right-hit promotion display 132SG431, will be hindered by the movable body operating due to the initial operation, and there is a risk that the player will suffer a disadvantage by not performing the right-hit operation.

In addition, in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 52 (F7), when the right-hit promotion display 132SG431 is displayed, a movable body performance is executed in which the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being executed when the right-hit notification part starts, it becomes difficult to determine whether the movable body is operating as the initial operation or the right-hit operation promotion performance.

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare performance is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare performance (right hit notification part) that involves the operation of the movable body 32A on the board is started. This prevents the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the right hit notification part in the fanfare performance, or making it difficult to distinguish whether the initial operation or the right hit operation promotion performance is operating.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare performance is executed, the introductory part period and the initial operation period of the fanfare performance are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period from when the fanfare performance starts to when the right-hit promotion performance starts (see Figure 52 (F1) to (F6)).

In addition, in the introductory part of the fanfare effect, when announcing which of the multiple types of jackpots A to E has occurred, it is possible to display the jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the jackpot type being controlled, and the pre-jackpot type display introduction display 132SG422 before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed.In the operation confirmation control, the initial operation ends before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 in FIG. 52 (F6), so that even if operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare effect, it is possible to know which type of jackpot has been controlled to.

When the fanfare performance is executed, the LEDs 9d, 9e, 9f, and 9g of the movable body above the board, the LEDs 9d, 9e, 9f, and the chance button LEDs 9g that are performing their initial operation light up in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the LEDs 9d, 9e, 9f, and the chance button LEDs 9g that are not operating under the operation confirmation control light up in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part) (for example, blue-based colors for a 3R jackpot and red-based colors for a 10R jackpot), but the initial highlighting mode (white light) is not used in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part). Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is under operation confirmation control even during the fanfare performance.

In addition, when the first movable body is moving due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in an illumination mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is performing the initial operation even during the fanfare performance.

In addition, when a fanfare performance is being performed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first brightness in a lighting pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance, while during operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness), thereby reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

The duty ratio of all movable body LEDs may be reduced from the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all movable bodies is completed (until the last movable body to be initialized is placed at the origin position), or the duty ratio may be reduced until a specified time has elapsed.

In addition, when the first movable body is operating due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlighting mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlighting mode, making it possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating due to the operation confirmation control.

The movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation is illuminated in a common initial highlight mode (white light) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position, while the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the performance operation control can be illuminated in different light emission modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Specifically, during the advance operation, the movable body LED is illuminated in a first mode (for example, a wave mode in which the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the attacca LED 9c, the movable body LEDs 9d, 9e, etc. are used to light up in stages from one side to the other side at a predetermined cycle), and during the retreat, the movable body LED is illuminated in a second mode (for example, a flash mode in which the movable body flashes at a fast cycle (such as 30 ms)). In this way, it is easy to determine whether the operation confirmation control or the performance operation control is being performed based on the initial highlight mode (white light) and the mode corresponding to the performance.

In addition, in the movable body performance executed in the right hit notification part of the fanfare performance, the movable body 32A on the board operates in a common operating mode (descending from the origin position to the performance position) with the initial operation, and in the initial operation, the movable body LED emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), and in the movable body performance, it emits light in a mode that is different from the initial highlighting mode (white light) and corresponds to the right hit notification part, and when the movable body operates in the initial operation, the sound output is restricted, and in the movable body performance executed in the right hit notification part, a sound corresponding to the right hit notification part is output. In this way, it is easy to determine whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed, depending on the initial highlighting mode and the mode corresponding to the right hit notification part.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance executed in the right hit notification part is the same as the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance and the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation may have only some operating modes in common, or may have all operating modes in common. Furthermore, the operating modes of both may all be different.

In addition, when executing a movable body performance in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare performance, it is possible to operate the movable body by a special action and display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance, and if the action confirmation control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is possible to determine that there is an action error and perform the action confirmation control again, and if the action confirmation control has been performed for a specific period of time, when the movable body performance is executed, the special action is restricted while the effect display is displayed. In this way, it is possible to show the player that the movable body performance has been executed by the effect display, while preventing the initial action from being hindered by the special action.

Form 4 (power cut immediately after fanfare begins)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where the power failure occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance will be described with reference to Fig. 81. Fig. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where the power failure occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance.

As shown in FIG. 81, after the combination of jackpot confirmation patterns is displayed statically in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the variable display based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the variable display ends, the pattern confirmation display period ends and the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command, and the jackpot fanfare performance begins. After a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare performance begins, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately after the fanfare effect starts is, in detail, immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the jackpot, and immediately after the CPU 103 recovers and the CPU 120 for controlling the effect receives the jackpot start command and starts the fanfare effect (introduction part). However, after starting with a hot start, only the power outage recovery command is sent with the recovery of the CPU 103, so the CPU 120 for controlling the effect cannot determine what state the game is in (whether it is in the fanfare period or not, etc.) until it receives the command to specify that the jackpot opening is open. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the text "Power being restored. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that the power outage is being restored is notified until the next command is received, that is, for the remaining period of the fanfare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control is started during the remaining period of the fanfare that notifies the player that the power outage is being restored, and ends before the fanfare period ends and a round of play begins. During the operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control.

After that, when a command for specifying that the large prize opening is open is received for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first time has started, so the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot, and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot begins. The chance button LED 9g lights up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare performance has begun, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, in the operation confirmation control that begins during the remaining period of the fanfare, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform the initial operation will light up in an initial highlighting mode (white lighting), but will light up at a lower brightness than when they light up in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). This reduces the power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while at the same time preventing the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm the operation of the movable bodies.

In addition, based on receiving a command indicating that the large prize opening has been opened, a performance corresponding to the round play (light emission and sound output corresponding to the music during the jackpot) is started. In detail, during the round play period, the large prize opening is open for a long period of time, allowing a large number of game balls to enter, and this is a period that is more advantageous for the player than the fanfare period or ending period of the jackpot, so a lively round performance is provided using images, lights, and sounds, but by ending the operation confirmation control before the round performance corresponding to this round play starts, the player can enjoy the round performance without having to worry about the movable body performing its initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect starts and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the fanfare effect period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the fanfare effect ends (see Figures 52 (F2) to (F6)).

The performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper board movable body LED9d, lower board movable body LED9e, and upper frame movable body LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light) in the cases where a power failure occurs during variable display and then power is turned on, and where a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and then power is turned on. It is possible to perform operation confirmation control in the cases where a power failure occurs during variable display and then power is turned on, and where a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then power is turned on. This makes it possible to prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power recovery, except for the movable body performing the initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and then the power is turned on, the image display device 5 displays a common recovery display 132SG510. For example, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is not displayed when the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, but if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed when the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed. There are differences, but as long as at least the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 is common, the display modes of the other displays do not need to be common.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a big win and then the power is turned on, the right hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at the same timing as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the game state, when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs, only the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to display the right hit promotion display 132SG430 depending on the game state. Furthermore, the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 may be different when a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a big win and then the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode promotes the right hit operation when a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a big win and then the power is turned on.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and can illuminate the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies performing the initial operation in an initial highlight mode (white light). If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies not performing the initial operation can be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance, and the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off). In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating by the operation confirmation control even during recovery.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance causes the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies performing the initial operation to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), by controlling the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies to light up at a lower brightness during the fanfare performance (performance operation control) than in the mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (see FIG. 56 (B)), it becomes possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (music during a jackpot), so it is possible to notify the user that restoration is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the fanfare performance was in progress before the power failure.

In addition, the operation mode of each movable body under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of each movable body under the performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under the operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period) and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to determine whether the operation confirmation control or the performance operation control is being performed.

Form 5 (power cut just before the fanfare ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs just before the end of a fanfare performance will be described with reference to Figs. 82 to 84. Fig. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs just before the end of a fanfare performance. Fig. 83 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the operation confirmation control is executed for a fanfare performance. Fig. 84 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 82, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the jackpot fanfare effect that was started based on the reception of the jackpot start command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

In more detail, the timing immediately before the fanfare effect ends includes the timing immediately before the fanfare effect (right hit notification part) started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving a jackpot start command ends, in other words, the timing immediately before the fanfare period during which the CPU 103 waits from the time it starts controlling the jackpot until it starts controlling the round of play ends (for example, the timing approximately 5000 ms before the end of the fanfare period).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery command sent when the CPU 103 recovers and the large prize opening open command corresponding to the first time. Based on this, over the round play period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the music during the jackpot, the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner suggesting music selection, and background sound (BGM) will be output in a manner corresponding to the music during the jackpot.

When started with a hot start, if there is remaining time in the fanfare period (for example, about 1000 ms), the CPU 103 will receive a power outage recovery command based on its recovery, and then after the remaining time of 1000 ms has elapsed, the first corresponding command to specify that the large prize opening is open will be received. During the remaining time in the fanfare period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be turned off, and background sound (BGM) will not be output. The movable body LEDs may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the recovery period.

In addition, after the operation confirmation control of each movable body is started with the start of the first game, the operation confirmation control ends before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first game ends and the next round of play begins. During the operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control.

After that, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command for specifying after the large prize opening is opened in the first round, and then receives a command for specifying while the large prize opening is open in the second round, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, and the movable body LED 9f on the frame emit light in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then emit light in a manner corresponding to the music during the jackpot that is output during the jackpot, and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music during the jackpot begins. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that the music during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the open state.

In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance, in the operation confirmation control that begins during the round play period, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform the initial operation light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but because they light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control, the power consumption when the power is turned on is reduced, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while at the same time making the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies brighter than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to the difficulty.

In addition, the operation confirmation control in the case where the power is cut off and then turned on just before the fanfare performance ends can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends, so even after the initial operation has ended, you can aim to win at the large prize opening without being hindered by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance, the opening control period of the special prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in the first play ends (see Figure 52 (F8) to (F9)).

As shown in FIG. 83(A), in a round game in which the big prize opening is controlled to be open for a specified period after the fanfare performance has ended, images for the round performance are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 indicating the direction in which the game ball is shot is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, and consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454 are displayed on the upper side of the display screen as round game-related displays.

Also, as shown in FIG. 83(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where only the support section 32b can overlap, the round count display 132SG451 and consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a and part of the support section 32b can overlap, and the winning ball count display 132SG452 and ball count display 132SG453 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a can overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform the initial operation will be explained with reference to Figures 84 (A) and (B).

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 83(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position and passes through the intermediate position, the presentation section 32a overlaps in front of the round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, and consecutive wins/total balls displayed 132SG454, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays. Also, the support section 32b overlaps in front of the right hit promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right hit promotion display 132SG430 (see Figure 83 (B)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the middle position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but because part of the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454 overlaps with the presentation section 32a on the front side, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454. However, because the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, and the number of balls output display 132SG453 do not overlap with either the presentation section 32a or the support section 32b, the player can see these displays (see FIG. 83 (C)).

When moving back from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advancement movement, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap with the right-hit prompting display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompting display 132SG430, which has a large impact on the game, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a round of play in which the big prize opening is opened to give the player an advantage, if the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball win by performing a right-hit operation while the big prize opening is open, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage, so it is preferable that the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 maintains visibility compared to other big prize information displays.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84(B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 83(A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the presentation position, and even after it has reached the presentation position, it does not overlap any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figures 83 (D) and (E)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display is the same when it returns from the presentation position to the origin position.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, which has a large impact on the game, is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In addition, while the initial operation is being performed, the under-board movable body 32B does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the jackpot information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.), so it is visible to the player.

In other words, in a round of play in which the big prize opening is opened to give the player an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or the initially operating under-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball win by performing a right-hit operation while the big prize opening is open, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage. However, in this embodiment, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is difficult to see for a shorter period of time due to the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or the initially operating under-board movable body 32B, compared to other big prize information displays, so it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body performing the initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body not performing the initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance), but the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance), so it is possible to draw attention to the movable body performing the initial operation even during a round of play.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body that is performing its initial operation emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), and the movable body LED of the second movable body that is not performing its initial operation emits light in a mode that corresponds to the music during a jackpot (round performance). However, when the first movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a mode that corresponds to the music during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing its initial operation even during a round of play.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a round play in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power interruption occurs just before the fanfare performance ends, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) is the same as the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) in a round play in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power interruption occurs just before the fanfare performance ends. However, in the present invention, However, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play in which the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power interruption occurs just before the fanfare performance ends may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play in which the pachinko game machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power interruption occurs just before the fanfare performance ends. In this way, it is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

Mode 6 (power outage immediately after the start of a round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately after the start of one round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 85. Fig. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately after the start of one round of play.

As shown in FIG. 85, after the big win fanfare ends and the round performance starts based on the reception of the big win opening command indicating that the first round of play (first round) has started, a power outage occurs immediately after which the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the big win game state is resumed.

In more detail, "immediately after the round performance has started" includes the timing immediately after the performance control CPU 120 has started the round performance based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, which indicates that the first round of play has started, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 has started to control the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately after (e.g., approximately 1000 ms later) when it has started to control the opening of the large prize opening in the round of play).

In this case, after being started with a hot start, only the power outage recovery designation command is sent with the recovery of the CPU 103, so the performance control CPU 120 cannot specify what state the game state is (whether it is in a round game period or not, etc.) until it receives the designation command after the first large prize opening. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). In addition, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing becomes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait for a while" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage is notified until the next command, the designation command after the first large prize opening, is received, that is, until the first round game period ends.

In addition, the operation check control is started during the first round of play when it is notified that the power outage is being restored, and ends before the end of the first round of play. During the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control.

Then, after receiving a command after the large prize opening is opened, which specifies that the period is when the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state, when a command during the large prize opening is opened, which specifies that the period is when the large prize opening has changed from a closed state to an open state, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first round of play has ended and the second round of play has begun, so that the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, and the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the music played during the big win, and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the big win begins. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that the music played during the big win can be selected from among multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the open state.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round performance and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, in the operation confirmation control that begins during that round play period, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform the initial operation will light up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but they will light up at a lower brightness than when they light up in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). Therefore, while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, by making the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm.

In addition, the operation confirmation control in the case where the power is cut immediately after the start of the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play and then power is turned on can be terminated before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends, so that even after the initial operation has ended, you can aim to win at the large prize opening without being hindered by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play is started and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period of the large prize opening and the initial operation period in one round of play are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends (see FIG. 52 (F9)).

The performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control to cause the operating above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, and above-frame movable body LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light) in the cases where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on. This makes it possible to perform operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on. This can prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power recovery, except for the movable body performing the initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, when the power is cut at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to the open state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and when the power is turned on afterwards, the image display device 5 can display the on-board movable body LED9d, the under-board movable body LED9e, the on-frame movable body LED9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are performing the initial operation in an initial highlight mode (white light). When the power is cut at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to the open state, and when the power is turned on afterwards, the on-board movable body LED9d, the under-board movable body LED9e, the on-frame movable body LED9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are not performing the initial operation can be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the control that controls the large prize opening to the open state, and the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off). In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating by the operation confirmation control even during recovery.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the round performance (music during a jackpot), so it is possible to notify that restoration is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the round performance was in progress before the power failure.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 6, if a power outage occurs immediately after the second or subsequent round of play (2R to 10R) has started, the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the above-mentioned first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) has started, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Mode 7 (power failure just before the end of a round)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round of play.

As shown in FIG. 86, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the round performance that was started based on the reception of a command to specify that the big prize opening is open, indicating that the first round of play (first round) has started, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the big prize play state is resumed.

In more detail, "just before the round performance ends" refers to the timing just before the round performance started by the performance control CPU 120 based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the first round of play has started, ends, in other words, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends control of the first round of play (for example, the timing just before the control of opening the large prize opening in one round of play ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the first round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the power outage recovery command and the first large prize opening after command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the first round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attack LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait a moment" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage recovery is notified until the next command, the second large prize opening after command, is received, that is, until the first round interval period ends.

After that, when the second big prize opening command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top board movable body LED 9d, the bottom board movable body LED 9e, and the top frame movable body LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first specified time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music during the big prize (round performance), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music during the big prize will begin. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music during the big prize can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the first round of play ends and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation check control is started during the second round of play and ends before the second round of play ends. The operation check control may be started during the round interval period in the first round of play. In addition, during the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is started during the second round of play following that round, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies are made lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period for the large prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control for the large prize opening in the second round of play is completed (see FIG. 52 (F10)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 7, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the second or subsequent round of play (2R to 10R), the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the above-mentioned first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) began, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Mode 8 (power interruption immediately after the start of a special interval)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Fig. 87 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the large prize winning hole in all rounds of play is completed is 0.5 seconds, whereas when the jackpot type is jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize winning hole in the third round of play is completed is 30 seconds (see Figure 8), and during this special round interval period, a promotion effect (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect.

As shown in Figure 87, after a power outage occurs just before the third round of jackpots C to E ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

The timing just before the third round of jackpots C to E ends includes, in detail, the timing just before the round that was started by the presentation control CPU 120 based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the third round of play has started, ends, in other words, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play (for example, the timing just before the control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), and the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the power outage recovery command and the third large prize opening after command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the third special round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage recovery is notified until the next command, the second large prize opening after command, is received, that is, until the third special round interval period ends.

After that, when the fourth big prize opening command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top board movable body LED 9d, the bottom board movable body LED 9e, and the top frame movable body LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first specified time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music during the big prize (round performance), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the music during the big prize will begin. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music during the big prize can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation confirmation control is started during the third special round interval period, and ends before the end of the third special round interval period. In addition, during the operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize opening in the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation confirmation control is started during the third special round interval period, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies are made lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F29)).

In the above embodiment 8, a form in which a special round interval is set after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play is completed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special round interval may be set after the opening control of the large prize opening in a round of play other than the third round is completed.

The performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control to cause the operating above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, and above-frame movable body LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light) in the cases where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and then the power is turned on. This makes it possible to perform operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and then the power is turned on. This can prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In addition, when the power is cut off at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and the movable bodies that are performing the initial operation, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body below the board, the LED 9f of the movable body above the frame, and the chance button 631B, can be illuminated in an initial highlighting mode (white light) when the power is turned on after the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state. In the case where the power is turned off at the same time that the power is cut off at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state, the LED 9d of the movable body below the board, the LED 9e of the movable body above the frame, and the chance button 631B, which are not performing the initial operation, can be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment), and the initial highlighting mode (white light) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off). In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating by the operation confirmation control even during the period when the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power recovery, except for the movable bodies performing the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 displays the recovery indication 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and is capable of executing an interval performance when the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during one round of play, and in the interval performance, the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B and the attacca LED 9c, can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (interval performance), and also the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f and the chance button 631B, which are movable bodies performing the initial operation, can be illuminated in an initial highlighting manner (white lit). Then, if a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to a closed state (special round interval) during the third round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to cause the movable bodies that have not yet performed the initial operation, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c, to light up in a manner corresponding to the recovery indication (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the third special round interval control, and the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval performance (music during big win). In this way, it is possible to notify that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage recovery designation command and a third large prize opening post-opening designation command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, during the third special round interval period, the image display device 5 displays the recovery in progress display 132SG510, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) is changed to a state corresponding to recovery in progress. In the above example, the display becomes silent and continues in this recovery state until the fourth large prize opening open command is received, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the interval performance is composed of an introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21)-(F23)) and a result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)-(F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control is performed before the result notification part starts. In this way, it is possible to avoid the visibility of the result notification part in the interval performance being hindered by the movable body performing the initial operation.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a movable body performance using the under-board movable body 32B as a promotion performance in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and when the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance operation control in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B that operates under the operation confirmation control, and it is preferable that sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates under the operation confirmation control, and that a sound corresponding to the movable body performance is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body performance. By doing this, it is possible to easily distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

In addition, in the movable body performance in the result notification part, an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance can be displayed, and the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B in the promotion performance (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally for a specific period, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the operation confirmation control again, and when a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state in one round game in which the interval performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and when the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance may be restricted while an effect display is displayed. In this way, it is possible to show the player that the movable body performance has been executed by the effect display while preventing the promotion performance from interfering with the operation confirmation control.

In addition, the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion performance (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under the operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advancement operation period) and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). In this way, it becomes possible to easily distinguish whether the operation confirmation control or the performance operation control is being performed.

In this embodiment, as an example of a movable body effect that is executed during the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended, the movable body 32B below the board rises to perform a promotion effect that notifies the player that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, which is more advantageous for the player than a 3-round jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various movable body effects can be applied in addition to the promotion effect described above.

For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the game state after the jackpot ends becomes a probability variable state (a state in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than the normal state) based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024 during a specific round of play during a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 88, as a movable body effect executed during a special round interval period, the under-board movable body 32B may rise to perform a V promotion effect that notifies the player that the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than a non-probability variable jackpot (a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot ends does not become a probability variable state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 88, if this V promotion performance is composed of an introduction part and a result notification part that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, if a power outage occurs at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state, and then the power is turned on, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control ends before the result notification part of the V promotion performance starts.

Mode 9 (power cut immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed) <Modification>
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a promotion effect (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect as described above may be executed during a specific round play period (for example, the period during which the opening control and closing control of the large prize opening are being performed in the third round of play), as shown in FIG. 89.

In this case, the promotion effect is composed of an introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21)-(F23)) and a result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)-(F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part. If the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part notifies the player that it is a jackpot A in a promotion failure mode, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B (10R jackpot), which is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part notifies the player that it is a jackpot B in a promotion success mode. In other words, it is preferable that the promotion effect can be executed when the variable display result of the first special pattern becomes a jackpot (first hit).

As shown in FIG. 89, after a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of jackpots A and B, during which the promotion effect is executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

The timing immediately before the start of the third round performance in which the promotion performance is executed includes, in detail, the timing immediately before the end of the round performance started by the performance control CPU 120 based on receiving the command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the second round of play has started, that is, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends the control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the second round interval period, etc.).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the power outage recovery command and the second large prize opening designation command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the second round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait a moment" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage recovery is notified until the next command, the third large prize opening designation command, is received, that is, until the second round interval period ends.

After that, when the third command to specify that the large prize opening is open is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first specified time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part) will begin. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the background music (BGM) corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part) can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacca LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation check control is started during the second round interval period (during recovery) or during the third round of play, and ends before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round of play starts. In addition, during the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the performance operation control (promotion performance).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control of opening the large prize opening in the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation confirmation control is started during the second round interval period or the third round of play, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light in the performance operation control (promotion performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, by making the movable body LED provided on the movable body at a lower brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, it is prevented from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm the operation of the movable body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round of play begins.

In the above embodiment 9, an example is given of a form in which the promotion effect is executed in the third round of play, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect may be executed in a round of play other than the third round.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body performing the initial operation emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body not performing the initial operation emits light in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, since the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), it is possible to draw attention to the movable body performing the initial operation even during the promotion performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode that corresponds to the promotion performance (introduction part), making it possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the initial operation of the movable body will end before the operation prompting part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, that is, the operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B, begins, so the visibility of the operation prompting effect in the introduction part will not be obstructed by the movable body operating under the operation confirmation control.

The performance control CPU 120 also ensures that the operating mode (the mode in which the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position) is the same when performing initial operation and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance, and when performing initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlight mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is restricted, and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode, etc.), while sound effects in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) are output. This makes it easy to determine whether the initial operation or the promotion performance is being performed.

In addition, in the movable body performance in the result notification part, an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance can be displayed, and the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B in the promotion performance (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally for a specific period, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the operation confirmation control again, and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round performance in which the promotion performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and when the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance may be restricted while an effect display is displayed. In this way, it is possible to show the player that the movable body performance has been executed by the effect display while preventing the promotion performance from interfering with the operation confirmation control.

Mode 10 (power outage just before the end of the final round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Fig. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play.

As shown in FIG. 90, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the round performance that was started based on the reception of a command to specify that the 10th round (final round) of play has started for jackpots B, D, and E, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot play state is resumed.

In more detail, "just before the round performance ends" refers to the timing just before the round performance started by the performance control CPU 120 based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the 10th round of play has started, ends, in other words, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends control of the 10th round of play (for example, the timing just before the control of opening the large prize opening in the final round of play ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the 10th round of play, etc.).

In this case, after being started with a hot start, the power outage recovery command and the 10th big prize opening after command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the 10th round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait a moment" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage recovery is notified until the next command, the big prize end command, is received, that is, until the 10th round interval period ends.

After that, when a jackpot end command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, and the top-frame movable body LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part) will start to be output. In addition, the chance button LED 9g and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off).

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation check control is started during the ending period and ends before the ending period ends. The operation check control may be started during the round interval period in the 10th round of play. In addition, in the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In this way, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the 10th and final round of play, operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies are made lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from becoming too bright and difficult to confirm.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the tenth and final round of play, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)) starts during the ending period, in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified.

In the above embodiment 10, the operation examples for the jackpots B, D, and E in which the final round is 10 rounds are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of the jackpots A and C in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third final round play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and the initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (FIG. 52 (F13)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified starts during the ending period. In addition, the final round is not limited to the above 3 rounds or 10 rounds, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body performing the initial operation emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body not performing the initial operation emits light in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), but the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), so it is possible to draw attention to the movable body performing the initial operation even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable body performing the initial operation will light up in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating will light up in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will emit light at a low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode that corresponds to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

In addition to the movable body LED, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b are also configured to emit light at a lower brightness during the operation check control period than when they emit light in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on without reducing the decorative effect.

Form 11 (power outage immediately after the beginning of the ending performance)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 91, after the round interval presentation in the 10th round (final round) of jackpots B, D, and E ends, a power outage occurs immediately after the ending presentation starts based on the receipt of a jackpot end command, and then the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

In more detail, "immediately after the ending presentation has started" includes the timing immediately after the presentation control CPU 120 has started the introductory part of the ending presentation based on the receipt of a jackpot end command, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 has started to control the ending period (for example, the timing immediately after the control of the closing of the jackpot opening in the final round of play has ended (for example, about 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, only the power outage recovery designation command is received with the recovery of the CPU 103, so the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine what state the game is in (whether it is in the ending period or not, etc.) until it receives the next command (for example, a customer waiting demo designation command, etc.). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). In addition, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes off, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait a moment" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

After that, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame-top movable body LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the high-base music (performance during time-saving), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the high-base music (performance during time-saving) will begin. In addition, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off), and the attacca LED 9c will be turned off.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately after the beginning of the ending performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation check control is started during the ending period and ends before the ending period ends. In addition, during the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the beginning of the ending performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies are made lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from becoming too bright and difficult to confirm due to the brightness.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified starts during the ending period.

In the above embodiment 10, the operation examples for the jackpots B, D, and E, in which the final round is 10 rounds, are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of the jackpots A and C, in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and the initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (Figure 52 (F13)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified starts during the ending period.

In addition, the ending periods for jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpots) were explained above as examples, but the same operation applies to the ending periods for jackpots A and C (3-round jackpots), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper board movable body LED9d, lower board movable body LED9e, and upper frame movable body LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting manner; white light) in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. It is possible to perform operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. This makes it possible to prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and can cause the movable bodies that are performing the initial operation, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white light). If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are not performing the initial operation can be lighted up in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (off in this embodiment) throughout the ending period, and the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery display (off). In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating by the operation confirmation control even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power recovery, except for the movable bodies performing the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable bodies performing the initial operation, but this light emission mode (turning off) is not used for performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). By doing this, it is possible to notify that recovery is underway when the power is turned on, even if the ending performance was in progress before the power outage.

Forms 12 and 20 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during time reduction will be explained based on Fig. 92 and Fig. 93. Fig. 92 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when the operation confirmation control is started based on the occurrence of a power outage during time reduction and the subsequent power-on. Fig. 93 is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays (A), and the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays (B).

As shown in FIG. 92(A), when the time-saving state is B, C1, or C2, a "BATTLE RUSH effect" is executed as a time-saving effect. In the BATTLE RUSH effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a second background display 132SG320 depicting a nighttime cityscape corresponding to the time-saving state, and an image of an ally character and an enemy character facing each other. In addition, a performance mode display 132SG221 consisting of the letters "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen. In addition, the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 displays a time-saving remaining display 132SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 685) corresponding to the remaining variable display number controlled to the low probability/high base state, the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 displays a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 consisting of the characters "right hit" and a right-facing arrow, and the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 displays a consecutive number of jackpots/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, which shows the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls dispensed during the consecutive jackpots.

In addition, the display area 5SL at the top left of the screen displays small patterns corresponding to the first pending memory count, the second pending memory count, and the decorative pattern, and on the left side of the screen, an active display area 132SG013 and a second pending display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second pending memory are arranged in the vertical direction, for example, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and four second pending displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second pending display area 132SG012, corresponding to the value of the second pending memory count being 4.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the second hold display area 132SG012, in which the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 and the second hold display 132SG002 are displayed, is displayed in a position where only the support part 32b of the movable body 32A above the board can overlap, the display area 5SL, in which the second hold memory count display is displayed, is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a and the support part 32b can overlap, and the performance mode display 132SG221 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the consecutive number of times/total number of balls issued display 132SG454 and the time reduction remaining display 132SG201 are displayed in a position where they can overlap part of the performance part 32c and the support part 32d of the movable body 32B below the board.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 93(A) and (B). Note that in Figures 93(A) and (B), the description of the performance mode display 132SG221 and the remaining time reduction display 132SG201 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 93(A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the performance part 32a overlaps the front side of the second pending memory number display (display area 5SL), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the display (see FIG. 92 (B)). After that, when the on-board movable body 32A moves to the middle position and the second pending memory number display becomes visible, the support part 32b overlaps the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see FIG. 92 (C)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but because the presentation section 32a overlaps with part of the front side of the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the second hold display 132SG002. However, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, second hold memory count display, consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, time-reduction remaining display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221 do not overlap with either the presentation section 32a or the support section 32b, so the player can see these displays (see FIG. 92 (D)).

When moving from the presentation position back to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advancement movement, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, second reserved memory number (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive win count/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, or time-saving remaining display 132SG201, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 92(D)).

Next, while the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with any of the right hit promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL), the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), and the presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see these displays, but since the presentation part 32c and the support part 32d overlap with the front side of the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 and part of the time reduction remaining display 132SG201, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays (see Figures 92 (D) and (E)). Note that when returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the underboard movable body 32B overlaps with each display is the same.

In this way, if an initial operation is performed when the power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), which have a large impact on the game, is less likely to be hindered by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by right-hitting operation, which is advantageous for the player, if the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing an initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by right-hitting operation during the period in which the second start winning can be generated, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage, so it is preferable that the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) maintain their visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

In addition, while the consecutive number of times/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, the display state of the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 can change even during the time-saving state due to changes in the number of winnings and advance notices. Therefore, the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B can prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which may change, from being hindered compared to the unchanged consecutive number of times/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454.

In addition, it is preferable that the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 due to the initial operation is greater than the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) due to the initial operation.By doing this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which may change, from being hindered by the on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation compared to the unchanging consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454.

Also, as shown in Figures 93 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, which has a large impact on the game, is less likely to be hindered by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by a right-hit operation, and this is advantageous to the player, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by a right-hit operation during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage, so it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains its visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

In addition, if the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B operate in a manner common to a predetermined performance operation control in the operation confirmation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the performance position), if a power outage occurs during the time-saving period, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and then restored, and an initial operation is performed, the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, while the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot. (e.g., consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454) is approximately the same as or longer than the time during which the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454 overlaps with the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may be operated in such a way that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454) regarding the jackpot.

For example, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may be configured to move from the origin position to a position that overlaps with the second reserved memory number and the second reserved display 132SG002 and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 during the initial operation, and then move to an intermediate position and return to the origin position. In this way, it is possible to prevent the movable body operating during the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the second reserved memory number and the second reserved display 132SG002 and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

Also, as shown in Figures 93 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, so that each movable body is set to perform an initial operation, making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a greater impact on the game than the second reserved memory number or the second reserved display 132SG002, is hindered.

In addition, in the embodiments 12 and 20, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL), the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), and the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) was described. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control is exemplified in a form in which the total overlap time is compared with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs the initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs the initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Form 13 (power cut just before the end of the change before the button notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 94, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variation pattern has started, the losing pattern combination is displayed stationary in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends just before a power outage occurs (for example, during the period when the losing pattern combination is temporarily displayed stationary, or during the pattern confirmation display period which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)). If there is a reserved memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will start.

Therefore, while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing, from when the power outage recovery designation command and the pattern determination command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received until the next command, which is the variable display start designation command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing becomes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and until the next command is received, that is, during the pattern determination display period, it is notified that the power outage is being restored.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, in the variable display preview performance decision process (step S132SG610), it is decided to execute a reach preview that teases whether or not a reach state will occur, and a button preview that prompts a button operation to decide whether or not a reach state will occur, and the variable display is started in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the decided preview performance, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the variation (background), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the variation (background) is started. In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the performance image corresponding to the variation (background) is started.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage restoration command, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part is started, in which the result of the button preview is notified.

As shown in Figures 50 (D6) and (D7), the button preview (result notification part) notifies the player of the result of operating the chance button 631B as to whether or not the game has reached a reach state. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as the game reaching a reach state, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation that executes the button notice, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts, so that the visibility of the button notice (result notification part) is prevented from being hindered by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the button notice is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the button notice (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the button notice (result notification part) starts (see Figures 50 (D1) to (D5)).

In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed to start the next variable display, it is decided to execute the button notice in that variable display. When it is decided to execute the button notice at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the result notification part of the button notice is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., about 20 seconds). In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the button notice (result notification part) is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that the button notice is a specific fluctuation pattern in which the button notice is executed, a specific performance control command (e.g., a winning performance designation command that specifies the execution of the button notice) that specifies specific information regarding the specific fluctuation pattern is transmitted, and the performance control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the result notification part of the button notice is started.

For example, if it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a button preview is executed will be used when a start winning occurs during a specified variable display, a winning performance designation command (specific information) is sent specifying that it will be a specific variable pattern (with button preview).

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of a specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern determination command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state based on the transmission of the performance pattern determination designation command, and after the pattern determination display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern determination command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with button warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation that has a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation being performed.

In more detail, in the initial operation, the maximum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed in sequence (going back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while in the shortened initial operation, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed simultaneously (for example, returning to the origin immediately after passing the origin position). In addition, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one movable body is in the middle of a maximum advancement operation, that operation is interrupted and a retreat operation is performed, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body including the one movable body are performed simultaneously. Note that if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation is immediately before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), switching to the shortened initial operation is not performed even if a specific variation pattern designation command is received.

For example, a light gathering effect (light gathering at the center of the screen to form a button image) can be executed immediately before the button image is displayed in the action promotion effect. Since the light gathering effect is an effect that uses a large part of the screen (an image that starts from the edge of the screen), it may overlap with the execution period of the initial action, and it is possible to conveniently notify the user that the button image will be displayed.

For example, when a button image is displayed in a motion promotion performance, the button's LED can be illuminated (red ⇔ off in 150 ms cycles), and the illumination mode in this illumination pattern is not included in the illumination pattern that highlights the movable body performing the initial operation.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts (to check the vibration motor 635E and notify the start of the initial operation), and it is also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B together with the display of a button image in the operation promotion performance (to indicate the degree of expectation of the change), and at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission mode of the button LED during vibration is different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the button image is displayed.

Form 14 (power interruption immediately before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start time notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start time notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 95, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variation pattern has started, the losing pattern combination is displayed in a stopped state in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends immediately before a power outage occurs (for example, approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing pattern combination is temporarily stopped or during the pattern confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)). If there is a reserved memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will start.

Therefore, while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing, from when the power outage recovery designation command and the pattern determination command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received until the next command, which is the variable display start designation command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing becomes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and until the next command is received, that is, during the pattern determination display period, it is notified that the power outage is being restored.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview performance decision process (step S132SG610) decides to execute the start preview, the variable display starts in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the decided preview performance, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g light up in a manner corresponding to the predetermined display change in the start preview, and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the start preview starts. Also, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery command, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the performance image corresponding to the start preview (introduction part) starts.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation check control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part is started, in which the result of the start-up warning is notified.

As shown in Figures 48 (B3a) to (B6a), the start notice (result notification part) notifies the player of results such as whether the pending display has changed and what color it has changed to. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the pending display has changed, will be hindered by the movable body operating due to the initial operation, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the start notice is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) begins, so that the visibility of the start notice (result notification part) is prevented from being hindered by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding the fluctuation for which the start notice is executed, the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the start notice (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the start of the start notice (result notification part) (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed to start the next variable display, it is decided to execute the start-up notice in that variable display. When it is decided to execute the start-up notice at the start of the variable display, the time from when the variable display starts to when the result notification part of the start-up notice is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds). Therefore, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the start-up notice (result notification part) is executed, the start-up notice (result notification part) is executed. The embodiment shows an example in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a start-time notice is executed is generated when a start winning occurs, a specific presentation control command that specifies specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command that specifies the execution of the start-time notice) is sent, and the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific presentation control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part starts as a result of the start-time notice.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a start-up notice is executed is to be used, a winning performance designation command (specific information) is sent specifying that it is a specific variable pattern (with start-up notice).

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of a specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern determination command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state based on the transmission of the performance pattern determination designation command, and after the pattern determination display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern determination command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with warning at start) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with an operating period shorter than the initial operation being performed (e.g., 5 seconds).

In more detail, in the initial operation, the maximum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed in sequence (going back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while in the shortened initial operation, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed simultaneously (for example, returning to the origin immediately after passing the origin position). In addition, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one movable body is in the middle of a maximum advancement operation, that operation is interrupted and a retreat operation is performed, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body including the one movable body are performed simultaneously. Note that if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation is immediately before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), switching to the shortened initial operation is not performed even if a specific variation pattern designation command is received.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts, and also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the active hold changes to red in FIG. 48 (B6) (for entertainment purposes), and at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission mode of the button LED during vibration is different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the color changes to red. If the button vibration is performed when the color changes to red during the initial operation, the button vibration when the color changes to red is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the initial operation ends.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts, and a button vibration notice (indicating a different level of expectation than the notice at the start) can be made in FIG. 48 (B1), with at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission mode of the button LED during vibration being different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration notice. If the button vibration notice is made during the initial operation, the button vibration notice is limited, and limited button vibration is made after the initial operation ends.

Form 15 (power interruption immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo consecutive announcement is executed will be described based on Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo consecutive announcement is executed.

As shown in FIG. 96, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variation pattern has started, the losing pattern combination is displayed stationary in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends (for example, approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing pattern combination is temporarily displayed stationary or during the pattern confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display), if a power outage occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a reserved memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will start.

Therefore, while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing, from when the power outage recovery designation command and the pattern determination command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received until the next command, which is the variable display start designation command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing becomes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and until the next command is received, that is, during the pattern determination display period, it is notified that the power outage is being restored.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the variable display is started in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern (pseudo consecutive) in which the pseudo consecutive announcement indicating whether the variable display will resume is executed and the determined announcement performance (movable body announcement), and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the background (change), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (change) is started. Also, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the performance image corresponding to the background (change) is started.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part is started, in which the result of the pseudo consecutive preview is notified.

As shown in Figures 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9), the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) notifies the result, such as whether the variable display has resumed, so if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the variable display has resumed, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial operation, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) starts, so that the visibility of the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) is prevented from being hindered by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) starts (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, the execution of the movable object prediction is determined together with the execution of the pseudo consecutive prediction, so the movable object prediction is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display has started, but since the operation confirmation control is being executed, as explained in the first embodiment, the performance operation of the on-board movable object 32A and the chance button 631B at the timing of the execution of the movable object prediction may be restricted, and only the effect display and sound effect corresponding to the movable object prediction may be output (see FIG. 66). Also, in the first embodiment, the performance operation of the on-board movable object 32A and the chance button 631B is executed after the initial operation is completed, but since the pseudo consecutive prediction (introduction part) has started, the performance operation of the movable object prediction is restricted, but the performance operation of the movable object prediction may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, it is decided to execute a pseudo consecutive announcement in that variable display. If it is decided to execute a pseudo consecutive announcement at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the result notification part of the pseudo consecutive announcement is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) is executed, the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) is executed. The embodiment shows an example in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part (notice part) starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed is generated when a start winning occurs, a specific presentation control command (for example, a winning presentation designation command that designates the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) that specifies specific information regarding the specific variation pattern is transmitted, and the presentation control CPU 120 may change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific presentation control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part starts as a result of the pseudo consecutive announcement.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed is to be used, a winning time performance designation command (specific information) is sent that designates the specific variable pattern (with pseudo consecutive announcement).

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of a specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern determination command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state based on the transmission of the performance pattern determination designation command, and after the pattern determination display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern determination command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with pseudo-continuous warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation that has a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation being performed.

In more detail, in the initial operation, the maximum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed in sequence (going back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while in the shortened initial operation, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed simultaneously (for example, returning to the origin immediately after passing the origin position). In addition, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one movable body is in the middle of a maximum advancement operation, that operation is interrupted and a retreat operation is performed, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body including the one movable body are performed simultaneously. Note that if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation is immediately before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), switching to the shortened initial operation is not performed even if a specific variation pattern designation command is received.

In addition, for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation prior to the one in which the moving object announcement or pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, and then the power is turned on, the performance action in the moving object announcement that was executed/limited during the initial operation is performed during the introductory part of the pseudo consecutive performance (a short initial operation is performed in Figure 49 (C4), and a performance action in the limited moving object announcement is performed in Figure 49 (C5)).

Mode 16 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation will be described with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power interruption occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on after that. Figure 98 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the panel and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body below the panel and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when a power outage occurs during the variable display of the normal game state and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power being restored. Please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

When the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed and it is detected that the player is playing with a right-handed shot based on the game ball being detected by a detection switch such as the gate switch 21 provided in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 displays a left-handed shot promotion display 132SG530 consisting of the words "Please return to left-handed shot" and a left-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (first path) on the left side of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in a position where a part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform the initial operation will be explained based on Figures 98 (A) and (B). Note that Figures 98 (A) and (B) show the relationship between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, and also allow comparison with the relationship with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figures 84 and 93), which is not actually displayed.

As shown in FIG. 98(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the recovery display 132SG510 or the left hit prompt display 132SG530, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 97(A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, part of the presentation part 32a and the support part 32b overlap the front side of the left hit prompt display 132SG530, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see FIG. 97(B)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes and the left hit prompt display 132SG530 becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see FIG. 97(C)).

When moving from the presentation position back to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advancement movement, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98(A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap any of the left hit prompt display 132SG530, the recovery in progress display 132SG510, and the right hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 97(A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps with the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the left hit promotion display 132SG530, the player can see the left hit promotion display 132SG530 (see Figures 97 (D) and (E)). Note that the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display occurs the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the normal variable display, and then the initial operation is performed when the device is started up with a hot start and restored, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left hit prompt display 132SG530 when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position, and does not overlap for the period during which the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position or origin position, so the visibility of the left hit prompt display 132SG530 is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation of the left hit prompt display 132SG530.

Also, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is longer than the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430. However, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a time-saving state or a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing an initial operation, the player may miss an opportunity to win by performing a right-hit operation and suffer a disadvantage, so it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains better visibility than the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can display the left hit promotion display 132SG530 and output the left hit operation promotion sound as a left hit operation promotion notification. When operation check control is performed based on starting up with a cold start after a power outage, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen while the left hit operation promotion sound is restricted, and when operation check control is performed based on starting up with a hot start after a power outage, it is preferable that the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen while the left hit operation promotion sound is output. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate left hit operation promotion notification that takes into account the situation at the time of power-on.

In addition, in the normal state, when a game ball enters the gate switch 21 or the like provided on the right game area side, a left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued, and in the normal state, a special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued that has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification based on a specific number of game balls (e.g., five balls) entering the gate switch 21, and the special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued for a period longer than the period (e.g., 20 seconds) during which the movable body operates due to the operation confirmation control. This makes it possible to prevent the special left-hit operation promotion notification from being hindered by the movable body operating due to the operation confirmation control.

Forms 17 and 18 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during a big win)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot will be explained based on Figures 99 and 100. Figure 99 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and the operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on after that. Figure 100 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 99(A), when a power outage occurs during a round of play in the jackpot game state and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power being restored. Please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

In addition, when a control command indicating a jackpot game state, such as an open command or an after-open command, is received together with the power outage recovery command, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen during the period when the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, and the player is encouraged to shoot the game ball into the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where a part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform the initial operation will be explained with reference to Figures 100 (A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 100 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the recovery in progress display 132SG510 or the right hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 99 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first the support part 32b overlaps the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the right hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 99 (B)).

When moving from the presentation position back to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100(A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 99(A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 99 (C)). Note that the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display occurs the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during a round of play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the power is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front of a specified area (see Figure 83 (A)) in which information corresponding to the round of play (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, so that the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be impeded. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to round play (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps with the front side of a specified area (see FIG. 83 (A)) in which information corresponding to round play is displayed is shorter than the period during which information overlaps with the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control.

In addition, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round play movable body presentation is performed at the start of a round play, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include the presentation operation in the round play movable body presentation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position).

In addition, if an initial operation is performed when the power is interrupted during a round of play in a jackpot play state and then started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap the front side of the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the visibility of the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 is less likely to be hindered. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which it overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period during which it is superimposed on the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510.

In addition, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round play movable body presentation is performed at the start of a round play, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include the presentation operation in the round play movable body presentation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position).

The time that the under-board movable body 32B stays in the presentation position overlapping the recovery display 132SG510 during the initial operation may be shorter than the presentation operation of the movable body presentation. For example, it is preferable that the stay time T1 of the movable body at the presentation position during the initial operation when the power is turned on after a power interruption occurs while the variable display is not being executed and the stay time T2 of the movable body at the presentation position during the movable body presentation are longer than the stay time T3 of the movable body at the presentation position during the initial operation when the power is turned on after a power interruption occurs while the variable display is being executed (T1 = T2 > T3). In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not interfere with the determination of whether or not the machine is being restored by not superimposing the recovery display 132SG510 for a long period of time on the movable body that operates due to the operation confirmation control that is performed when the power is turned on after a power interruption occurs during an advantageous state.

Form 19 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power interruption occurs during time reduction and the operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on after that.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when a power outage occurs during variable display in the time-saving state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power being restored. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at a position where a part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap (see Figure 101 (C)).

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, when the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A is started, the variable display is stopped based on the transmission of a pattern determination command, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends, and the second background display 132SG320 is displayed. When the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the support part 32b overlaps with the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes through and the area where the right hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible, but when it descends to the performance position, the performance part 32a overlaps with the front side of part of the recovery display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery display 132SG510 (see FIG. 101 (B)).

When moving from the presentation position back to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, the overlap time is longer during the movement of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position, and therefore the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101(A), when the underboard movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see FIG. 101(C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display occurs the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the time-saving state, and then the initial operation is performed when the device is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap the front side of the specific area (see Figure 101 (A)) in which the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed, rather than being superimposed on the front side of the specified area (see Figures 101 (B) (C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., performance mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls output display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. Therefore, when the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends and the normal state is restored, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., presentation mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps with the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control is shorter than the period during which information is superimposed on the front side of a specified area (see Figures 101 (B) (C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., presentation mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) is superimposed on the front side of the specified area (see Figures 101 (B) (C)).

In addition, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round play movable body presentation is performed at the start of a round play, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include the presentation operation in the round play movable body presentation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position).

In addition, in the embodiments 17 to 19, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the recovery display 132SG510, and information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) was described. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control is exemplified in a form in which the total overlap time is compared with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs the initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs the initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Forms 21 to 24 (Start-up sequence when initial operation control is executed)
In the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when power is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 (the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start or hot start committee), the special symbol lamp constituting the special symbol display device 4A, 4B and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are lit simultaneously. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of lighting the special symbol lamp when power is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 and the timing of lighting each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be different.

For example, as shown in Figures 102 (A) to (G), when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, first, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 begins on the image display device 5. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds as in Figures 61 and 62) has elapsed since the start of the display of the start preparation display 132SG500, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B begin to light up (see Figures 102 (A) and (B)).

At this timing, the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized again, so that the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in the state of being deenergized. That is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time-saving state and is started with a hot start after being deenergized while no normal winning has occurred, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and is started with a hot start after being deenergized during an interval period, etc., the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are closed again. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time-saving state and is started with a hot start after being deenergized while a normal winning has occurred, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and is started with a hot start after being deenergized while the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) is open, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state.

After these special chart lamps are turned on and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in their power-off state, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) start to light up.

After this, as an initialization notification, the image display device 5 displays an initialization notification image, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up in an initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L, 8R start to output an initialization notification sound. After that, confirmation operations are performed for the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control (Fig. 102 (D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is not being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a cold start, as shown in FIG. 103(A), after the power is cut off, the CPU 103 first transmits a power-on command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives a power-on command) three seconds after the image display device 5 starts displaying the start-up preparation display 132SG500. At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized, which starts lighting up the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, and the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, which causes the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to go to their initial state (closed state).

The special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B at this time are initially illuminated in a manner that is in effect when the variable display result is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B at this time may be illuminated in a manner that is indicative of a variable display result other than a miss, or in a manner that is different from any of the variable display results.

In addition, after these special chart lamps are turned on and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in their initial states, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts to light up.

Then, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power-on command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 starts displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600 instead of the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts displaying, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, board-top movable body LED 9d, board-bottom movable body LED 9e, frame-top movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts emitting light in the initialization notification mode, and confirmation operations are performed for the board-top movable body 32A, board-bottom movable body 32B, frame-top movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operations.

By doing this, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 makes it easy for players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to recognize that the power has been turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it also makes it possible for players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to check the lighting of the special chart lamp, which has a large impact on the game, without being distracted by the operation of checking each movable body.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and variable display is being executed, if power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, as shown in FIG. 103(B), after the power is cut off, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 starts to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power recovery designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery designation command). At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, which starts the lighting of the special symbol lamps that constitute these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B (and the variable display of the special symbol by the blinking of the special symbol lamps), and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, which causes the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 starts displaying the recovery display 132SG510 instead of the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After that, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, board-top movable body LED 9d, board-bottom movable body LED 9e, frame-top movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up, and the board-top movable body 32A, board-bottom movable body 32B, frame-top movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are checked as initial operations.

In addition, if the variable display that was running before the power outage stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, and then a new variable display starts, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends when the new variable display stops, as shown in FIG. 103 (B).

In other words, when the number of pending memories is 0 and the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the special pattern is resumed, and if the resumed variable display stops while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, when a new variable display starts due to the occurrence of a new start winning, the start preparation display 132SG500 switches to displaying the recovery display 132SG510 during the new variable display. Furthermore, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in FIG. 103(B), while the recovery display 132SG510 is being displayed and the variable display is in progress, confirmation operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are started as an initial operation.

As shown in FIG. 103(B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal state or time-saving state and variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display that has been executed before the power cut is not stopped while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display will stop after the recovery display 132SG510 starts to be displayed in place of the start preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 (at the same time, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends), as shown in FIG. 104(A).

Also, as in FIG. 103(B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal state or time-saving state and variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, and even if the variable display that was being executed before the power cut is stopped while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5, if there is pending memory when the variable display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a new variable display is started based on the pending memory while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and after the variable display is stopped. In this case, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends at the timing when the new variable display is stopped.

As described above, in the examples shown in Figures 103 (A) and (B) and Figures 104 (A) and (B), when a background image or performance image corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the image display device 5, the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is not started, so it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being hindered by the background image or performance image corresponding to the variable display on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 104(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the game is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop during the display of the start preparation display 132SG500, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as the initial operation are started simultaneously. The explanation is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as the initial operation may start at different times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal state or a time-saving state and variable display is being executed, when the power is cut off and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts to light up in a manner corresponding to the recovery being performed during the display period of the start preparation display 132SG500 (more precisely, during the two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command from the CPU 103), and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as an initial operation starts during the display period of the recovery display 132SG510.

The lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, top panel movable body LED 9d, bottom panel movable body LED 9e, top frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in a manner that corresponds to the recovery in progress may continue even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has ended, and may be ended, for example, when the confirmation operation of each movable body has ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 105(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or time-saving state and variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display stops during the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 and a new variable display does not start, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the image display device 5 starts displaying a background image corresponding to the variable display being stopped from the timing when the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the background image.

In the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105, a case has been described in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving, that is, when variable display can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power outages can occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even when the gaming state is a jackpot, in which variable display is not executed.

In the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is powered down during a jackpot game and starts up in a hot start, if the power is cut off while the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning port) is in an open state due to a round game, as shown in FIG. 106(A), after the power is cut off, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 starts to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power outage recovery command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives a power outage recovery command). At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized, which starts lighting up the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B (and variably displaying the special symbols by blinking the special symbol lamps), and the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to the state before the power was cut off. In other words, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the special variable winning ball device 7 is open.

In addition, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage restoration command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 starts displaying the restoration in progress display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, top-board movable body LED 9d, bottom-board movable body LED 9e, top-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts lighting up in a manner that corresponds to the restoration being performed.

While the recovery display 132SG510 is still displayed, confirmation operations are performed on the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operations.

After the initial operation is completed and the round of play ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state in response to the end of the round of play. Then, in response to the start of the next round of play, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from a closed state to an open state, the image display device 5 starts displaying an image corresponding to the round of play, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts lighting up in a manner corresponding to the round of play.

In the example of FIG. 106(A), a power outage occurs during a round game, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round game before the power outage ends after the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 106(B), when a power outage occurs during a round game, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round game before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and the next round game starts (special variable winning ball equipment In the case where the device 7 goes from an open state to a closed state and then goes back to an open state, even after the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 has ended, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be lit in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress until the confirmation operations of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as the initial operation are completed.

As shown in Figures 106 (A) and (B), if a power outage occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (during a round of play) for a jackpot game, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, and when each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the round of play, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132 Since the confirmation operations of SG101 and the chance button 631B are not executed, it is possible to prevent the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) from lighting up in a manner appropriate to the round of play, which would interfere with the confirmation work to see whether the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are being executed normally.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105, a case has been described in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving. However, as shown in Figure 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state before the power outage occurs, and while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of Figure 107(A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command to when the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends), the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state is in a hot start state. If a game ball enters the ball device 6B, that is, if a second start winning occurs while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, after the start preparation display 132SG500 ends, the image display device 5 displays the recovery display 132SG510 until the timing for stopping the variable display corresponding to the second start winning, and while the recovery display 132SG510 is being displayed, the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is started as initial operation control.

In the example shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state before the power outage occurs, and a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of FIG. 107(A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command to when the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the variable display of a normal pattern is being executed before the power outage occurs, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, and a normal winning pattern occurs on the image display device 5 while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state as an initial operation control from the timing before the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B begins.

By executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figures 107 (A) and 107 (B) above, it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In the example of FIG. 107(A), the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 after a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 may be switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 at the timing when a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state.

In addition, in Figures 106 (A) and (B), a case where the power is interrupted when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and starts up in a hot start is illustrated, where the power is interrupted when the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in an open state due to a round of play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 108, in a case where the power is interrupted when the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in an open state due to a round of play, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start. As a result, while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the example shown in FIG. 108, during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends), if the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state again for the next round of play, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 should start after the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends.

By executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. 108, it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In addition, in form 3, a part of the fanfare effect that started while the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed cannot be seen by the player, and when the start preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the fanfare effect can be seen from the continuation of the part that was not visible, whereas in forms 21 to 24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display that started while the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed cannot be seen because a recovery display is displayed. In other words, the variable display is intentionally controlled so that it cannot be seen because there must be no errors in the important information related to whether or not a jackpot will be hit, whereas the fanfare effect is intentionally controlled so that it can be seen because it has an operation direction notification part to encourage right-hand hits, which are necessary for the subsequent jackpot play.

Form 25 (Relationship between the initialization notification image and the initial operation) <Modification>
Next, the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control will be described with reference to Fig. 110 and Fig. 111. Fig. 110 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control. Fig. 111 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by cold start processing after a power outage occurs, a power-on command, a game status background command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo command are transmitted based on the CPU 103 being restored after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing when the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5. Then, based on receiving these performance control commands, the performance control CPU 120 determines that power-on with initialization has been performed (started up by cold start processing), and causes the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, board-mounted movable body LED 9d, board-mounted movable body LED 9e, frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g to light up in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and starts outputting an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (see Figures 61 and 62).

In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is hidden and the first background display 132SG310 is displayed based on the game state background designation command (normal background). However, in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization, the initialization notification display 132SG600 as described in FIG. 102 is displayed with the start of the initialization notification.

In this case, after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts, the initial operation by the operation confirmation control is started, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. In this way, it is possible to quickly confirm that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body operating by the operation confirmation control, and it is possible to prevent the movable body operating by the operation confirmation control from interfering with the confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has ended.

In addition, the period from power-on with initialization (start-up with cold start processing) until operation check control is performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (start-up with hot start processing) until operation check control is performed. This prevents the initialization notification display 132SG600 from becoming invisible due to operation check control being performed immediately after power-on with initialization.

In addition, it is preferable that the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (e.g., 30 seconds) and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period, and that even if a start-up winning occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started. This makes it possible to perform operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, if the execution period of the variable display that starts based on the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display may be continuously displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. In this way, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden and an effect image corresponding to the variable display may be displayed.

In addition, after power-on without initialization (start-up with hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 may not be displayed, and the background may be displayed based on the game status background designation command. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, as in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization (startup with cold start processing), the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is started, and then the initial operation by the operation confirmation control is started, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 109, if a start winning occurs after the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends and it is decided to execute the movable object notification, the movable object notification is executed, while as shown in FIG. 110, if a start winning occurs during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600 and it is decided to execute the movable object notification, as described in embodiment 1, during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, not only the performance operation due to the movable object notification, but also the output of the effect display and sound effect are restricted, and the performance operation due to the movable object notification is performed after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends.

Mode 26 (Operation Check Control) <Modification>
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figs. 111 to 14. Fig. 111 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. Fig. 112 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the win/lose button performance as a modified example.

In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57 (A) to (J), when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the performance control CPU 120 executes operation check control based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start processing (or hot start processing). First, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Fig. 57 (B)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Fig. 57 (C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Fig. 57 (D)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Fig. 57 (E)). Next, the under-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), and then the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(G)). Next, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), and then the under-board movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) has passed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends, but the operation mode of each movable body can be changed in various ways.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111(A), when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the origin position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the origin position, the separation distance L1 between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B is shorter when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the performance position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the performance position, as shown in FIG. 111(B).

In this modified example, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B, which have the above-mentioned relationship, may be configured such that in the operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial operation periods overlap (see FIG. 111(B)), and then, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111(C)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111(D)), so that their respective initial operation periods do not overlap.

By doing this, it is possible to simultaneously check that the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) can operate normally in the presentation position, and that the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) can operate normally in the presentation position, simplifying the confirmation process, and at the same time making it possible to individually check the movement of the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) from the presentation position to the origin position, and the movement of the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) from the presentation position to the origin position, which are difficult to check.

In this modified example, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as their initial operation periods overlap, for example, during the period from when one of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A starts moving from the origin position to when it stops at the performance position, the other starts moving from the origin position to the performance position. In other words, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the advancement operation periods of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of the form in which the below-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position in the win/lose button performance, but it is also possible to use a first movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 112(A), in the win/lose button presentation, during the period during which the operation promotion presentation is being executed during the operation effective period or when the operation effective period has elapsed, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the presentation position (see FIG. 112(B)) and the below-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the presentation position to lift the on-board movable body 32A so that the presentation operation periods of the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B do not overlap (see FIG. 112(C)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may simultaneously move from the presentation position to the origin position so that the presentation operation periods of the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap (see FIG. 112(D)).

For the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform the performance action in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap) in this manner, it is preferable to execute the initial operation in the operation confirmation control in an operation mode that does not include the performance action described in Figures 112 (B) to (D) (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are advanced separately). By doing so, it is possible to perform the operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG134 (see FIG. 2) is provided that can detect that a second movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) is positioned at a performance position, and the operation of the first movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) positioned at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134, thereby making it possible to perform the operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, in the operation confirmation control, if the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are not positioned at the origin position before the long initial operation control is started, return control is performed to move the movable bodies to their initial positions (for example, short initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101), so that the operation confirmation control can be performed optimally.

Mode 27 (operation confirmation control)
Also, as shown in Figure 57, the under-board movable body 32B provided on the game board 2 and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a are capable of executing initial operations, and when the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 57 (F)), the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position (see Figures 57 (G) to (I)).

In this way, the first movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) placed at the performance position during the operation confirmation control indicates that the operation confirmation control has not ended, and by starting the operation of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) when the first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is placed at the performance position, it is possible to prevent the operation confirmation control of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) from being overlooked.

Specifically, frame-side movable bodies such as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are easily tampered with because they can be touched by players, so if they fail to operate normally like board-side movable bodies such as the above-board movable body 32A and below-board movable body 32B, and the board-side movable body is forced to start over from its initial operation, the board-side movable body can be intentionally put into a dead-end state (see Figure 113 (A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 113(B), if the frame-side movable body cannot operate normally, the board-side movable body is withdrawn, and an error image regarding the malfunction of the frame-side movable body (for example, a caption such as "Please check the frame movable body", which is erased when the frame-side movable body can operate normally) is displayed on the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5, and if the frame-side movable body cannot operate normally even after performing the initial operation (only the frame-side movable body; the operating mode is the same as when the power is turned on) at the time of error determination up to five times (more times than the board-side movable body, and the conditions until the dead end are stricter considering that it is easily tampered with), only the frame-side movable body can be transitioned to a dead end state.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG104 (see FIG. 2) is provided that can detect that a second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) is positioned at a performance position, and the operation of a first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) positioned at a performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104, thereby enabling the operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

The following describes in further detail the mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A reduced identification information having a size smaller than that of the decorative identification information and corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information can be variably displayed (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display of a small pattern corresponding to a decorative pattern).
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 134 ) that moves the decoration identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display in which the reduced identification information is switched to another reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information (for example, a switching display. See FIG. 135(E) ).
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one piece of decoration identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decoration identification information, and during the period until the display of the one piece of decoration identification information is completed, the reduced identification information can be switched multiple times (for example, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern is completed, the small patterns are switched to small patterns of losing combinations five times, and each small pattern is displayed for a period Ta1 (period Ta1<period Ta2). See FIG. 135(E)).
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is configured by a combination of the decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326");
The display result of the variable display of the reduced symbol information is configured by a combination of the reduced symbol information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326");
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination does not become the variable display of the reduced identification information before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop and display the fixed decorative pattern of the losing combination (for example, "326"), a part that switches and displays so that the small pattern of the losing combination, which is the same as the decorative pattern, "326" is not displayed after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern and before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern of the losing combination (for example, "326"). See FIG. 135(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived so that the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of the reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination.Therefore, it is not known in advance that a non-specific combination will be derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information from the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of the reduced identification information, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Light-emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the valid display area among the plurality of the decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, a part which becomes a big win or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" displayed in a stopped position in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R).
In the case where a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be displayed in a manner in which it is enlarged from a normal size and then returned to the normal size (for example, a portion in which a variable stop action can be executed when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern in a variable display based on a miss variable pattern. See Figures 149 to 151, 155, and 156).
When the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged (see Modification 3 of FIG. 170 ).
During the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is also continuously performed when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed (for example, even when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a variable stop action when temporarily stopping and displaying a decorative pattern, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d is performed. See Figs. 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination, which is a combination of decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is temporarily enlarged and displayed, so that the player can be drawn to the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, and even if a non-specific combination that is essentially meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept on the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Furthermore, when the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, and the load of the display control can be reduced. Furthermore, the predetermined light emission control is continued even when the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, so that the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a frontward moving display (e.g., a scroll display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the back side to the front side while increasing transparency, and then erased (see FIGS. 141 to 143 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the rear side of one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character image of the other decoration identification information is displayed while the number image is not displayed. After the one decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the other decoration identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 143(A) and (B), the one decoration identification information is displayed in the period from when it is displayed in the frame-in display area 5L, 5C, 5R to when it is displayed out of the frame, (For example, a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located at the rear so as to overlap partially with decorative pattern "2" may become visible through decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in FIG. 143(C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in number display portion 002SG051 of decorative pattern "3" is displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when performing a front-moving display in which the decorative identification information is moved from the back side to the front side while increasing its transparency and then erased, the other decorative identification information located at the back side of one decorative identification information can be seen through the first decorative identification information.In this case, the other decorative identification information located at the back side has its character image displayed while its number image is not displayed, and the first decorative identification information is erased and then the number image of the other decorative identification information is displayed.Therefore, the number image of the one decorative identification information and the number image of the other decorative identification information are not displayed overlapping each other, and it is possible to prevent the number image of the one decorative identification information located at the front side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a frontward moving display (e.g., a scroll display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing transparency, and then disappeared (see Figs. 144 and 145 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the rear side of one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character image of the one decoration identification information is displayed while the number image is not displayed, and the other decoration identification information is erased and then the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 144 (G) (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the rear side, so that another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") located on the rear side so as to overlap part of one decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") may become visible through the decorative pattern "3" during the period from when it is frame-in displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R to when it is frame-out displayed. At this time, the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). Variation 1)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when performing a front moving display in which the decorative identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing its transparency and then erased, the other decorative identification information located at the back side of one decorative identification information can be seen through the one decorative identification information.In this case, the one decorative identification information located at the front side has its character image displayed while its number image is not displayed, and the other decorative identification information is erased and then the number image of the one decorative identification information is displayed.Therefore, the number image of the other decorative identification information and the number image of the one decorative identification information are not displayed overlapping each other, preventing the number image of the other decorative identification information located at the back from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Light-emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a rotation display in which the ornament identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the ornament identification information (see Figs. 146 and 147 );
During the rotation display, the decoration identification information is semi-transparent, and when the rotation display stops, the decoration identification information is non-transparent (see FIGS. 146 and 147 ).
The ornament identification information includes a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
The number image on the front side of the decoration identification information that is in a semi-transparent state during the rotation display is displayed, while the number image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 147 ).
During execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control for making the light emitting means emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period is repeatedly performed, and the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotation display (for example, even when variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in a high base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in that order based on a loop light emission control (see FIG. 137(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Modified example. See FIG. 157).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when performing a rotational display in which the decorative identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative identification information, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, so that not only the front side but also the back side of the decorative identification information can be seen through. In this case, the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information is displayed, but the number image on the back side is not displayed, so that the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information and the number image on the back side are not displayed overlapping each other, which prevents the number image on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. In addition, since the predetermined light emission control is continued during the rotational display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the ornament identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left ornament pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right ornament pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle ornament pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is achieved in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and on the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and a reach line suggestion performance is executed in which the reach line suggestion performance is erased (e.g., a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion performance).
After the reach state is reached, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a first transparency (e.g., first transmittance F1) until the reach line suggestion performance is executed, and after the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a second transparency (e.g., second transmittance F2) which is less transparent than the first transparency (see FIG. 165 ).
After the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the timing at which the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area (for example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the timing at which the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2 which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. See Figures 163 to 165).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggesting image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and at the timing when the reach line suggesting image is erased from the third area, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes a second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area does not interfere with the reach line suggesting image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A light emitting means,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the ornament identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left ornament pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right ornament pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle ornament pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is achieved in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and on the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and a reach line suggestion performance is executed in which the reach line suggestion performance is erased (e.g., a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion performance).
When executing the reach line suggestion performance, it is possible to execute an enlarged display for enlarging the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and a separation display for separating the decorative identification information after executing the enlarged display (see FIGS. 163 to 165 ).
The second period from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period te1 from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1; see FIG. 165 ).
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means during the execution of the reach line suggestion performance (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changed. See Figures 163 (F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggesting image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third region, and the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions is enlarged and displayed for a first period, and then spaced apart for a second period longer than the first period, thereby allowing the player to recognize the decorative identification information that forms the reach state. Also, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggesting image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A light emitting means,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the ornament identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left ornament pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right ornament pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle ornament pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is achieved in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and on the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and a reach line suggestion performance is executed in which the reach line suggestion performance is erased (e.g., a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion performance).
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means during the execution of the reach line suggestion performance (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changed. See Figures 163 (F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and on the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Light emitting means (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means includes:
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to operate the decorative identification information in a predetermined operation mode over a first period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative patterns is repeatedly performed until the variable display of the special patterns is completed. See Figures 136(C), 155, and 156).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the low base state, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly performed. See Figures 137(B), 155, and 156).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the high base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed. See FIG. 157).
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4. See FIG. 137(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed to encourage the player to change the display of the decorative identification information, while in the special state in which the variable display is likely to be performed, the player is prevented from being excessively encouraged to change the display, which may cause the player to feel annoyed. Also, since the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter cycle than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be suitably highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
Information regarding the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as reserved memory information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 performs a process of storing reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the reserved memory number in the start winning determination process of step S101).
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the effective display area (for example, a part that becomes a big win or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped and displayed at the stopping positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R).
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be displayed in a manner in which it is enlarged from the normal size and then returned to the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, a part in which a variable stop action can be executed when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern. See Figures 149 to 152),
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information is maintained at a normal size regardless of the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, in a high base state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, when a variable display based on a shortened variable pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, a variable stop action is not executed and the size is maintained and the decorative identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. See Figs. 152 and 157).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, interest is enhanced by providing variation in the movement of the decorative identification information when it stops according to the number of pending memories, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is difficult to see, the decorative identification information is stopped while maintaining its size, so that it can be stopped without compromising its visibility.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images);
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See FIG. 153 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased (for example, when the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the fade-in display portion is displayed).
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is a portion that is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from when the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R starts until they are displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21). See Figures 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the fade-out display basically gives the impression of having disappeared more suddenly the shorter the period in which it is executed, if there is a possibility that the variable display of the decorative identification information and the background change are executed at the same time, the fade-out display of the identification information is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images);
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See FIG. 153 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased (for example, when the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the fade-in display portion is displayed).
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display and the execution period of the background fade-out display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-out display of the identification information with the fade-out display of the background, it is possible to prevent the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to notice.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images);
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See FIG. 153 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased (for example, when the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the fade-in display is performed).
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is a portion that is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B21 from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R to when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21). See Figures 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the fade-in display basically gives the impression of appearing suddenly the shorter the period in which it is executed, if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are executed at the same time, the fade-in display of identification information is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the end of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images);
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See FIG. 153 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased (for example, when the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the fade-in display portion is displayed).
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display and the execution period of the background fade-in display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 155 and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-in display of the identification information and the fade-in display of the background, it is possible to prevent the end of the variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to notice.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A specific effect can be executed in which the variable display is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pseudo consecutive announcement" that incites whether or not the variable display will be resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, that is, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner).
The decoration identification information has decoration identification information of multiple colors (e.g., blue and red) including a number image,
When the variable display is resumed in the specific performance, a number image (e.g., pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) capable of specifying the number of times the variable display has been resumed can be displayed in multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) (see FIG. 161 and FIG. 162).
In the specific performance, there are a first combination in which the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are the same type, and the colors of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different, and a second combination in which the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed and both the colors of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are the same type.
In the specific performance, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination (for example, in a pseudo consecutive prediction, there is a case where the display colors of the decorative pattern displayed in a provisional stop and the pseudo consecutive number display are non-identical, and a case where the display colors of the decorative pattern displayed in a provisional stop and the pseudo consecutive number display are the same, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in a pseudo consecutive prediction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, attention can be drawn not only to whether or not a specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of the number image of the decorative identification information temporarily displayed and the number and color of the count image if the specific effect is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A reduced identification information having a size smaller than that of the decorative identification information and corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information can be variably displayed (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display of a small pattern corresponding to a decorative pattern).
When the variable display is not being executed, a waiting effect that displays a predetermined image can be executed (for example, a portion that can execute a "waiting-for-customer demo effect" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the performance control CPU 120 received a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command. See FIG. 159 ).
When the standby effect is being performed, the decoration identification information is hidden, while the reduced identification information is continued to be displayed (see FIG. 159 ).
If the start condition for the variable display is satisfied while the waiting performance is being performed, the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, and then, after the predetermined image is hidden, the decorative identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if a start winning occurs while a customer waiting demo performance is being performed, the variable display of the small pattern is started before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden, then the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the performance mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode), and then the decorative pattern is displayed and the scrolling display is started. See FIG. 160).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decorative identification information begins after the specified image is made invisible, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun as a result of the conditions for starting the variable display being met, but since the variable display of the reduced identification information begins before the specified image is made invisible, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing a variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variable display of a special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161).
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 138).
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 134) in which the decoration identification information moves, and a pre-action display (e.g., a variable start action, see FIG. 136(A)) in which the decoration identification information operates in a manner different from the moving display before the moving display starts,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 139 (C) to (F)).
The decoration identification information is variable displayed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of a decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the period required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and it is possible to increase interest when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts in the normal state which tends to be monotonous. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing a variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variable display of a special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161).
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 138).
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 134) in which the decoration identification information moves, and a pre-action display (e.g., a variable start action, see FIG. 136(A)) in which the decoration identification information operates in a manner different from the moving display before the moving display starts,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display is ended (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 139 (C) to (F)).
The decoration identification information is variable displayed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of a decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and when the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decoration identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decoration identification information, so that the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information is not started until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decoration identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than that in the special state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state which is likely to be monotonous. In addition, since a common switching display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, the number of patterns of the switching display can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing a variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variable display of a special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161).
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 138).
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 134) in which the decoration identification information moves, and a pre-action display (e.g., a variable start action, see FIG. 136(A)) in which the decoration identification information operates in a manner different from the moving display before the moving display starts,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. Modified example).
The decoration identification information is variable displayed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decoration pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to a corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making it possible to effectively utilize the period required for performing the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing a variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variable display of a special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161).
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 138).
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 134) in which the decoration identification information moves, and a pre-action display (e.g., a variable start action, see FIG. 136(A)) in which the decoration identification information operates in a manner different from the moving display before the moving display starts,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the moving display is not started until the switching display is ended (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period ends. Modified example).
The decoration identification information is variable displayed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decoration pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the above-mentioned common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and when the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decoration identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decoration identification information, so that the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information is not started until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decoration identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state. In addition, since a common switching display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of patterns of the switching display can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display can be controlled to one of a plurality of display modes (e.g., the first display mode to the fourth display mode) including the first display mode and the second display mode;
When starting the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to execute a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
In the first presentation mode, a moving display is executed in which the decoration identification information is moved as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 133(A1) and 133(A2)).
In the second presentation mode, a special variable display different from the moving display is executed as the variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 133(B1) and (B2)).
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22. See FIG. 158 (A) and (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second presentation mode, not only is the manner in which the decorative identification information is variable displayed differently from that in the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period from the start of the variable display to the erasure of the decorative identification information is longer, so that the decorative identification information can be focused on for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display can be controlled to one of a plurality of display modes (e.g., the first display mode to the fourth display mode) including the first display mode and the second display mode;
When starting the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to execute a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
The variable display pattern of the decoration identification information can be determined to be any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
The execution period of the fade-out display is different between the case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first presentation mode and the case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display periods A21 and A22 are different between the case where the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and the case where the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. See FIG. 158 (A) (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, the fade-out execution period differs between when the display is controlled in the first presentation mode and when the display is controlled in the second presentation mode, making it difficult for the player to predict that the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) which is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display start condition is satisfied until the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed, and a post-variable display period after the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed (for example, the variable display period of the special pattern includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special pattern and the small pattern starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts).
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable-display period and the post-variable-display period,
The related information image is erased before the start of the post-variable display period after being displayed in the pre-variable display period (for example, the name of the character (character related information) displayed in the information display unit 002SG053 is erased before the start of the post-variable display period, that is, before the start of the scroll display of the decorative pattern, after being displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed. See FIG. 136(A) and FIG. 139).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by drawing attention to the related information image before the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information, i.e., while the image is still displayed, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. Also, by erasing the related information image before the start of the variable display, the player can draw attention to the variable display, preview effects, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In the normal state, the display can be controlled to one of a plurality of display modes including a first display mode (e.g., the first display mode) and a second display mode (e.g., the second display mode) (e.g., the first display mode to the fourth display mode. See FIG. 133 );
In the special state, the display mode can be controlled to a third display mode (e.g., a third display mode or a fourth display mode),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) which is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a form including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 139 );
In the second and third presentation modes, the decoration identification information is displayed without including the related information image (see Figs. 141, 142, and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first presentation mode, the related information image is displayed to draw the player's attention to the related information image, thereby enabling the player to deepen his/her understanding of the character, while in the second and third presentation modes, the related information image is erased, allowing the player to focus more on the variable display and preview presentations rather than the related information image.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The ornament identification information includes a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG061),
When the normal background image is displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute an SP reach effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot will be hit),
In the notification performance, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification performance is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification performance (for example, in a SP reach performance, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 166 (F)),
With the end of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 166(G), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols for determining a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed).
A specific image (e.g., specific image 002SG075) is operationally displayed adjacent to the number image of the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern displayed after the end of the SP reach performance (see FIG. 166 (H) and (I)), whereas in the high base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is not displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern displayed after the end of the SP reach performance (see FIG. 167 (P) and (S))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the effect of the presentation is enhanced and livened up by displaying a specific image in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, a sense of speed can be imparted to the variable display by not displaying a specific image in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine of aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The performance control means includes:
When the corresponding display (e.g., active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (e.g., active display area 5F) is erased based on the completion of the variable display of the specific identification information, an erase effect display (e.g., erase effect 002SG110) can be displayed to emphasize that the corresponding display has been erased,
If the hold display is being displayed when the erase effect display is displayed, the erase effect display continues to be displayed until a variable display corresponding to the hold display starts (for example, the erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased when the next variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. See FIG. 138 (B3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the presentation from declining. Also, the erasure effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, while the display of a new corresponding display allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has started.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
A gaming machine according to a twenty-sixth aspect is the gaming machine according to the seventeenth or eighteenth aspect,
The area in which the ornament identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left ornament pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right ornament pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle ornament pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 132 );
In the special state, the decoration identification information in the first area, the second area, and the third area is displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 132 );
The third area in the special state is disposed closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 132).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the decorative identification information in the first and second regions is made to appear larger, and the decorative identification information in the third region is shifted to create a sense of depth and enhance interest, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decorative identification information is positioned closer to the center of the display region, thereby enhancing the degree to which the decorative identification information can be recognized.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the near side of FIG. 114 is the front (front face, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the rear (rear face, back) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing with the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "002SGS1", "Normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach", and "Super reach" may be abbreviated to "SP reach".

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 114 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided at the top left of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the right-hit notification image 002SG201 (see FIG. 133) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and the remaining time-saving display 002SG202 (see FIG. 133) that indicates the number of remaining time-saving turns are displayed in front of the performance images such as characters (upper layer), thereby preventing the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbol, and the error display, while the decorative symbol may be displayed behind the performance images (lower layer), thereby preventing the decorative symbol from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable bodies 32A and 32B cover all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

The pattern displayed on the fourth pattern display device provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7 at a specified location on the game board 2), such as the first special pattern LED or the second special pattern LED, is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. The reserved displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern reserved memory display area in which a first reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern reserved memory display area in which a second reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 115). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can be changed between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 114, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 115), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 114). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in FIG. 114), movable bodies 32A and 32B that operate according to the presentation are provided. In addition, movable body lamps 9d are provided on movable bodies 32A and 32B. The movable body lamps 9d and the aforementioned main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, and attacca lamps 9c may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. The main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacca lamps 9c, and movable body lamps 9d are each composed of an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 115).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 115).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on and off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable bodies 32A and 32B, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 115. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images on layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images on layer 2, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images on layer 3. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (composite) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area in which an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area, is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a first interface image including a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first special pattern reserved memory count and the second special pattern reserved memory count at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second interface image including a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display at the top left of the display area of the image display device 5 are drawn to display these images.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to the highest display priority, and are therefore displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, and is displayed as the middle image in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) is set to the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as the lower image in the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable bodies 32A, 32B to the movable bodies 32A, 32B or to the drive circuit that drives the movable bodies 32A, 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable bodies 32A and 32B (such as supplying signals to operate the movable bodies 32A and 32B) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 116 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 116 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 116(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 116(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change of the decorative pattern in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and probability variable control are both performed (high probability high base state, time-saving with probability variable state). In addition, the time-saving high probability state may simply be called the "high probability state."

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 116(A) are just an example, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball having entered each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control is executed.

Figure 117 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 117, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 118 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 119 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 119 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which after the jackpot gaming state ends, probable variable control and time-saving control are executed to transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "non-probable variable jackpot", in which after the jackpot gaming state ends, only time-saving control is executed to transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The variable probability control and time-saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C are ended on the condition that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, the time-saving control that is started after the end of the non-variable probability jackpot game state is ended on the condition that 100 variable displays are ended, or that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state before the 100 variable displays are ended. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is any of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C, the variable probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot game state ends, so that the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is called a consecutive state. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays unless the variable display result becomes a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 119(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, while when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 119(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A", which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 120 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, one normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of fluctuation patterns are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns: super reach (no pseudo consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns are as follows: a variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo consecutive hits) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-2); a variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo consecutive hit) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-3); and a variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo consecutive hits) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-4).

As shown in FIG. 120, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 121 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121, when the variable display result is a non-variable jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a sure-win A to C, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is one or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B. More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C. More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability-changing state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 80% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 10% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection ratio of one of the multiple jackpot variable patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied according to the game state, for example, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variable pattern suitable for the game state, which can increase the interest in the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 115 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 002SG150 as shown in FIG. 122 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. 122 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 002SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 002SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 002SG151C, a game control flag setting section 002SG152, a game control timer setting section 002SG153, a game control counter setting section 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 002SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 002SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 002SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they were detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 115 stores not only a performance control program, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 115 is provided with a performance control data holding area 002SG190 as shown in FIG. 123(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 002SG190 shown in FIG. 123(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 002SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 002SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A as shown in FIG. 123 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, two commands, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory or the second special chart reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A shown in FIG. 123(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 123(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 124 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 124, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (step S8). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was fluctuating, it is sufficient if the fluctuating special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, the process enters into a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 125. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 125 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and if necessary, it is possible to issue a warning according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 125. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set for transmission in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 125.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 126. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (002SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) or not (002SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 002SGS102 is not the upper limit (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 002SGS101 (002SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 002SGS102 (002SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (002SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (002SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the second reserved memory count in 002SGS105 is not the upper limit value (002SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 002SGS103 and 002SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 (002SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random numbers extracted in this way and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserved information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (002SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 125 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (002SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 125 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

After executing the process of 002SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is advanced to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Special pattern normal processing)
Fig. 128 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Fig. 126 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in Fig. 128, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; N), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" (step 002SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 002SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 002SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 002SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 002SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 002SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 002SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 118 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002SGS150). In addition, in this step 002SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of a jackpot is off and the game is in a low probability state (this feature is in a low probability, low base state), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result judgment table selected in step 002SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so in the processing of step 002SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine whether the special game display result is a "jackpot", so that when the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is judged (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 002SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 119(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 002SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types according to whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 002SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 002SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as a variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is to be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, for example, the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, is set (step 002SGS155), and the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, it is set to "3". After processing step 002SGS155, proceed to step 002SGS156.

Also, if step 002SGS150 determines that the result is a miss (step 002SGS150; N), step 002SGS156 is executed without executing steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determined jackpot type in the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, if the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "high probability jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 002SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 129. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 129 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, the operation of displaying the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the operation of lighting the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the operation of driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B are controlled. In addition, the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update process (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to another background image, and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, the second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, the third background image corresponding to the third presentation mode, and the fourth background image corresponding to the fourth presentation mode is selected and displayed. The first and second background images can be displayed when the game state is in a normal state, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is in a low probability high base state, and the fourth background image can be displayed when the game state is in a high probability high base state. In addition, the first and second background images are switched when a switching display condition is met, for example, when a variable display of SP Reach Hare is executed or when one of the background images is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes a process for adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and a process for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command until the customer waiting demo performance starts, and may start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 129 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 130, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a reservation display update process (step S161) to perform a shift display (described later) that updates the reservation memory display (first reservation display 002SG101 or second reservation display 002SG102) in the special chart reservation memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A. After the reservation display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the performance process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable bodies 32A and 32B, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 130. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

In addition, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are aligned to an even number as the stopping pattern.

When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-variable jackpot, similar to the case where the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable jackpot B to the variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol may be determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In this case, by further making the presentation during the jackpot game or the variable display in the variable jackpot state more common, the player can be drawn to whether the game state is in the variable jackpot state or the time-saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times, and further whether the time-saving state will end with 100 variable displays or continue until 10,000 variable displays, thereby improving the interest.

If the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned (miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern. If the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination (miss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach with pseudo consecutive wins (fluctuation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) (step 002SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is not a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach, that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a normal reach (step 002SGS278; N), the process proceeds to step 002SGS383.

If the variation pattern designation command read out in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command for a super reach, the display color of the stopped patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5C that form the reach state is specified from the data indicating the stopped patterns of the decorative patterns determined in step 002SGS276 and stored in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Then, using the pseudo consecutive number of times display determination table shown in FIG. 162(C), the display color of the pseudo consecutive number of times display displayed when the first re-variable display is started, that is, the pseudo consecutive number of times display (e.g., "x2") indicating that two variable displays, including the first variable display, will be started in the variable display, is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279). If it is determined that it is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279; Y), the pseudo consecutive win count display determination table shown in FIG. 162(C) is used to determine and store the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display to be displayed when the second re-variable display is started, that is, the pseudo consecutive win count display (e.g., "x3") indicating that three variable displays, including the first variable display, will be started in the variable display (step 002SGS280).

If it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not two pseudo consecutive wins, or if the processing of step 002SGS280 is executed, a start waiting timer is set to start the pseudo consecutive win count display (step 002SGS281), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and the process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 002SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns and small patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns and small patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Decorative designs and small designs)
Next, the decorative pattern and the small pattern will be described based on Fig. 132 to Fig. 135. Fig. 132 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern and the small pattern. Fig. 133 is a diagram showing the state of the first presentation mode (A1) (A2), the second presentation mode (B1) (B2), the third presentation mode (C1) (C2), and the fourth presentation mode (D1) (D2). Fig. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the first presentation mode (A1) (A2), and the second presentation mode (B1) (B2). Fig. 135 is a diagram showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the third presentation mode (C1) (C2), and the fourth presentation mode (D1) (D2), and (E) is a diagram for explaining the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the small pattern.

In addition, in FIG. 132, the sizes of the decorative pattern (for low base state), decorative pattern (for high base state), and small pattern are displayed at the ratio when displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R and display area 5S.

As shown in FIG. 132, the decorative patterns (for low base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display section 002SG051 consisting of a circular number base section when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section, a character display section 002SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display section 002SG051, an information display section 002SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base section when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, in this embodiment, the name of the character) displayed on the front of the information base section, and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG054 displayed so as to surround the periphery of the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 002SG053 shows the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various information other than the name (such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052.

The decorative patterns (for high base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 002SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9", and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG064 displayed surrounding the number display section 002SG061. The decorative patterns for the high base state do not have a character display section or information display section like the decorative patterns for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S provided in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern. The small pattern consists of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but it is not necessary that all the numbers of both patterns correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern may be numbers "1" to "5", which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" of the decorative pattern, or may be symbols or figures different from the numbers of the decorative pattern.

Next, we will explain the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns.

<Display time of each pattern> The decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) are almost always displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the image display device 5 is powered on, but may be erased (not displayed) when, for example, an SP reach performance (super reach performance) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo performance is executed. On the other hand, the small patterns are always displayed in front of the decorative patterns (higher layer) while the image display device 5 is powered on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative patterns are erased as described above. Furthermore, they may be erased when information with a higher display priority than the small patterns (for example, an error display) is displayed.

<Variable display mode of each symbol> In the first performance mode described below, the decorative symbols (for low base state) are variably displayed by a scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and in the second performance mode, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by a scroll display that moves curvedly from the back to the front across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the third presentation mode described below, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed variably in a rotating display that rotates around an axis of rotation facing the up and down direction in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and in the fourth presentation mode, the decorative symbols are displayed variably in a scrolling display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or presentation mode, the small symbols are displayed variably in a switching display (updating display in which the symbols are updated) in which symbols "0" to "9" are switched in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

The above-mentioned "scroll display" and "switching display" are both included in the "switching display" in which patterns are switched in a broad sense, but as described below, a "scrolling display" may be defined as a display in which a pattern is framed in or faded in to the display area, and then framed out or faded out from the display area, thereby updating and displaying multiple patterns, while a "switching display" may be defined as a display in which multiple patterns are updated and displayed by repeatedly displaying and not displaying (erasing) or rotating, etc., at a specified position in the display area, without moving, fading in, or fading out.

<Number display section> The decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) have not only the number display section 002SG051, 002SG061, but also the character display section 002SG052, the information display section 002SG053 and the base display section 002SG054, whereas the small pattern is composed only of the number display section.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed at the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and are displayed at a size slightly smaller in the center decorative pattern display area 5C than in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, creating a sense of depth. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for high base state) are displayed at the same size in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. The small patterns are displayed at the same size in each small pattern display area 5SL, 5SC, 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are arranged approximately horizontally at approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the image display device 5, but the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is arranged slightly above the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, so it is arranged slightly above the approximately center position in the vertical direction of the image display device 5, while in the high base state, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R is arranged approximately horizontally at approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the image display device 5. Therefore, the decorative pattern displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the high base state is arranged closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 than the decorative pattern displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the low base state (see Figure 133).

In addition, when the size of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a standard, the size of the number display section 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display section of the small pattern is small. In other words, the size of the number display section is larger in the order of decorative pattern (for high base state), decorative pattern (for low base state), and small pattern (size of number display section: decorative pattern (for high base state) > decorative pattern (for low base state) > small pattern). In addition, the overall size of each pattern is also in the same relationship as the number display section.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to look larger, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is shifted to create a sense of depth and increase interest, while in the high base state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative patterns are positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby increasing the degree of recognition of the decorative patterns (see Figure 133).

The decorative pattern (for low base state), the decorative pattern (for high base state), and the number display part of the small pattern are each formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created by 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) with points placed on a three-dimensional coordinate system as vertices, information that reproduces the material, etc. is given to each surface, and an object is reproduced by illuminating it from an arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.), but it may also be an image that can be viewed stereoscopically by displaying it on a three-dimensional display device (for example, an image liquid crystal panel that can display a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front of the image liquid crystal panel, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel that is provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel).

Of the numbers "0" through "9" in the decorative symbols, the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" are probability variable symbols corresponding to a "probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a high probability, high base state after the jackpot ends, while the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" are normal symbols (non-probability variable symbols) corresponding to a "non-probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a low probability, high base state after the jackpot ends. Note that even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, the normal symbols may be configured to produce a predetermined jackpot combination.

<Character display section> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed with a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The character display section 002SG052 may also be formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, the character displayed on the character display section 002SG052 is configured to perform a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display starts or stops, as described below. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have a character display section.

<Information display section> The information display section 002SG053 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The information display section 002SG053 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display section 002SG053 also displays "name", which is information about the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052, and as described below, the "name" is erased when variable display begins. On the other hand, no information display section is provided for the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern.

<Pedestal display section> The pedestal display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) has a decorative section that decorates the character displayed on the front, and is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The pedestal display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Both the pedestal display section 002SG054 and the pedestal display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, when the size of the pedestal display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a standard, the size of the pedestal display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large. On the other hand, no pedestal display section is provided for the small pattern.

<Main color> The color of the numbers displayed on the number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) and decorative pattern (for high base state) is "blue" for normal patterns consisting of even numbers, and "red" for special patterns consisting of odd numbers. Note that the number base parts other than numbers and the base display parts 002SG054 and 002SG064 may be displayed in the same color as the numbers or in a different color than the numbers.

The characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured with their own original color without being influenced by the main color. Also, the character corresponding to the probability variation pattern is preferably an ally character, for example, when there are ally characters and enemy characters. Alternatively, it is preferable that the ally character be a central character in the story, such as the protagonist in the story or a character who has a close relationship with the protagonist.

As mentioned above, when the story concept of allies and enemies is applied, the preview and SP reach effects are basically presented from the perspective of the allies, and if the SP reach effect is structured as an allies and enemies fighting, the player is notified that a favorable state (such as a jackpot) will occur if the allies win against the enemies and the outcome is favorable for the allies.

In addition, the main color with the highest occupancy rate in the entire area of each of the decorative patterns (for low base state) and the decorative patterns (for high base state) may be composed of the same color as the numbers. Also, although the color "blue" was used for the normal patterns consisting of even numbers and "red" for the special patterns consisting of odd numbers, they may be other colors.

In addition, in a high base state, as described below, the scrolling display is performed at high speed, so it is necessary to make the design more visible and appealing than the decorative design (for a low base state), and stop design announcements and announcements of when the fluctuation will start are often performed by incorporating effect displays into the decorative design. As a result, the decorative design (for a high base state) is mainly composed of the number display section 002SG061, and is characterized by a larger size ratio of the design than the decorative design (for a low base state) which is composed of a character display section and a number display section.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the numbers in the decorative pattern (for the high base state) may be made more flashy in appearance, such as by making the operation more complex or by making the design more sophisticated, compared to the numbers in the decorative pattern (for the low base state), in order to enhance the high base state.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is "yellow" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. In this embodiment, the colors are "yellow" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers, but they may be other colors. Also, numbers that are the same as the decorative symbols may be the same color as the decorative symbols.

The design of the small symbols may be a reduced version of the material of the numbers in the decorative symbols in the low base state and high base state, but rather than enhancing the presentation effect through design, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the numbers in the decorative symbols (for example, flat rather than three-dimensional, and with a simple color that is not glossy) in order to improve visibility for the player.

As shown in FIG. 133, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute any one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see FIG. 133 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see FIG. 133 (B1) (B2)), the third presentation mode (see FIG. 133 (C1) (C2)), and the fourth presentation mode (see FIG. 133 (D1) (D2)). The first presentation mode and the second presentation mode are presentation modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in FIG. 133 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background image 002SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 133 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 134 (A1) and (A2), each decorative pattern is displayed as a frame-in downward from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed as a frame-out downward from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed as a frame-in (e.g., the decorative pattern "3") passes the stopping position for the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the succeeding decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative pattern "4") is displayed as a frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (A2), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stopping position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the trailing "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stopping position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the trailing "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in number in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and the updated display of "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative patterns are scrolled by displaying the decorative patterns of "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The display area 5S located in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and the small symbol, while the special pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that is being executed. Note that the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, the small symbol, the special pending memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common to all performance modes, so their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in FIG. 133 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 002SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 133 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (second scroll display) that moves in a curved shape from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 134 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed as frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving toward the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and are displayed as frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R toward the side. The center decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed as it moves from the back of the screen to the front of the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and then is displayed as frame-out.

Also, when the leading decorative pattern (e.g., the "2" decorative pattern) displayed in the frame passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set at the vertical center position of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (B2), when the leading "2" decorative pattern passes near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the following "3" decorative pattern and the "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in number in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and the update display from "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 133 (C1), in the third performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 002SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 133 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotational display that rotates around an axis of rotation that faces in the vertical direction.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 135 (C1) (C2), the decorative pattern in the third performance mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b, which is the opposite surface of the first surface 5a, and the preceding decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces the front, it is not possible to determine whether the succeeding decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of "4") is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, since the base display unit 002SG064 has low transmittance (opaque), the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative pattern).

The decorative patterns can also be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from first surface 5a to second surface 5b to first surface 5a to second surface 5b, the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating the display from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135 (C2), when the first surface 5a is rotated by about 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces the front and the second surface 5b is displayed, the second surface 5b displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "3") displayed on the first surface 5a. Next, although not shown in particular, when the second surface 5b is rotated by about 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces the front and the first surface 5a is displayed, the first surface 5a displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "4") displayed on the second surface 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a time-saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 133 (D1), in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 133 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 135 (D1) and (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame-in manner downward from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed in a frame-out manner downward from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in a frame (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) passes the stopping position for the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the succeeding decorative pattern (e.g., the "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in a frame-in manner and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 135(D1), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stopping position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the trailing "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but as shown in FIG. 135(D2), after the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stopping position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the trailing "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in number from "0", "1", "2", "3", ... and then return to "0" after "9", and the increase from "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative patterns are scrolled by displaying the "0" to "9" decorative patterns in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

In the second presentation mode, the name in the information display section 002SG053 of the decorative symbol is always hidden even when the decorative symbol is stopped. In the third and fourth presentation modes, the decorative symbol is variable displayed without including the information display section 002SG053. In this way, in the first presentation mode, the information display section 002SG053 is displayed to draw attention to the character's name, allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character, while in the second and third presentation modes, the information display section 002SG053 is hidden to draw attention to the variable display and preview presentation, etc., rather than the character. Note that not only the name displayed in the information display section 002SG053, but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 135(E), the decorative patterns and small patterns have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed, one decorative pattern is framed-in from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a passing period Ta2 is required for it to be framed-out from the bottom edge. In other words, a period Ta2 is required from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the decorative pattern display ends. Meanwhile, during the period Ta2, the small patterns of a losing combination are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (e.g., five times).

In more detail, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (30 frames (frames) of images are displayed per second), 10 frames of images are displayed from the start of the display of one decorative pattern to the end of that display, and this period Ta2 is set to approximately 0.3 seconds.

Meanwhile, the small symbols of different losing combinations (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display ends, the small symbols of losing combinations are switched five times, each displayed for the period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). Note that although the small symbols of each losing combination are displayed for the period Ta1, this is only for a split second (approximately 0.06 seconds), making it difficult to see with the naked eye.

Furthermore, if the CPU 120 for controlling the performance decides to stop displaying the fixed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326") based on the determination that the display result of the variable display will be a losing display result, then after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"), a switching display is performed so that the small pattern of the losing combination "326" that is the same as the decorative pattern is not displayed. This prevents the small pattern of the losing combination from revealing in advance that the decorative pattern of the losing combination will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the first, second and fourth presentation modes, and in the rotating display in the third presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops; in other words, the variable display speed is variable, whereas the small patterns are variably displayed at a constant speed from when the variable display starts until it stops.

(Various actions of decorative patterns)
Next, various action displays of the decorative symbols will be described with reference to Fig. 136. Fig. 136 shows (A) a variation start action of the decorative symbols, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in Figures 136(A) to 136(C), the decorative symbols for the low base state move within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and rotate within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to perform variable display, but apart from such variable display movements, various actions (operations) can be performed to change the number display portion 002SG051 and character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative symbols.

(Change start action)
As shown in FIG. 136(A), when the variable display starts in the first and second presentation modes, the decorative pattern executes a "variation start action" in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 reverses the body direction from left to right. Specifically, in the variation start action A1, the character is in a normal state in which both hands are placed on the hips and facing diagonally forward to the right, in the variation start action A2, the character is in a state in which both hands are raised and spread out and facing forward, and in the variation start action A3, the character is in a state in which both hands are placed on the hips and facing diagonally forward to the left. Here, for the sake of convenience of explanation, only the state of three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are displayed, but in reality, the character is displayed for several tens of frames during the variation start action period (A1 to A3), and a variation start action (movement) is performed in which the character's body direction changes in the order of diagonally forward to the right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward to the left (A3).

Next, after the character's body faces diagonally forward and to the left, the decorative pattern moves (rises) a predetermined distance from the stopped position in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction (A4), and then starts to move downward, starting the scrolling display. These change start actions A1 to A4 are executed over a change start action period Tb1 (see FIG. 137) from when the variable display of the special pattern starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern (the downward movement of the decorative pattern) starts.

For ease of explanation, only four frames of the change start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown here, but in reality, the change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's movement over several dozen frames during the change start action period Tb1, which is until the character's body orientation is reversed.

In the present embodiment, the change start action is exemplified by a mode in which the character's body direction is reversed left and right, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of the change start action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving the body. Also, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern takes action. In other words, the change start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern starts to be scrolled or rotated, and is an action that changes in the scroll display, that is, a separate action that operates in a different mode from the scroll display.

In addition, in the first presentation mode, during the variation start action period Tb1, the character's name (character related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden). In this way, the character's name is easy to see when it is displayed still, but once the scrolling display has started, the character's name is hidden, drawing attention to the scrolling display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols starts until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts. The name of the character (character related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after it is displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period starts, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts. In this way, by erasing the name during the variable start action period Tb1, i.e., before the scrolling display starts, attention can be drawn to the variable display and preview performances, rather than the name.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the variable display of the special and small symbols starts until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-variable display period may be the period from when the variable display start condition is met until the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, that is, the period from when the start winning occurs or when the variable display based on the reserved memory starts until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts.

(Fluctuation stop action)
As shown in Figure 136 (B), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (when the decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state), a "variable stop action" is executed in the decorative pattern in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character goes from its normal state, with hands on hips and facing diagonally forward to the right (variable stop action B1), to an enlarged state that extends farther above the base display unit 002SG054 than in the normal state (variable stop action B2), and then is reduced in size and restored to the normal state (variable stop action B3).

For ease of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop action B1, B2, and B3 are shown here, but in reality, the fluctuation stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character in motion over several dozen frames during the fluctuation stop action period Tb2, from when the character is enlarged until it is restored.

In this embodiment, the change stopping action is exemplified by the enlarged display of the character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change stopping action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving the body. Also, at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern may take action. In other words, the change stopping action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from actions that change such as scrolling and rotating displays.

(Loop action)
As shown in Figure 136 (C), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed until it is stopped (pattern is confirmed)), in the decorative pattern, a "loop action" is executed in which the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 repeatedly shrinks and restores, and the number display unit 002SG051 repeatedly rotates horizontally around a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction.

Specifically, in loop action C1, the character has both hands on his hips and faces diagonally forward to the right, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in a normal manner; in loop action C2, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054 and the numeric display unit 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right; in loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in a normal manner; and in loop action C4, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054 and the numeric display unit 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. In this loop action, loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are executed in sequence over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action returns to C1, and the loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. In other words, in the loop action, loop actions C1 to C4 are executed cyclically.

For ease of explanation, only four frames of loop actions C1 to C4 are shown here, but in reality, the character is reduced in size and then restored, and during the loop action period Tb3 from when the numeric display section 002SG051 rotates to when it is restored, the character and numeric display section 002SG051 are displayed over several dozen frames, thereby performing the loop action (movement).

In this embodiment, the loop action is exemplified by displaying the character in a reduced size and rotating the number display unit 002SG051, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the loop action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving the body. Also, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern is in action. In other words, the loop action is an action that is executed from when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position until it is stopped (pattern is confirmed), and is a separate action from the action that changes in the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative patterns and the light emission control of lamps will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Fig. 137 (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and the period of light emission control of lamps, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of lamps.

As shown in FIG. 137(A), the decorative pattern fluctuation start actions A1-A4 (see FIG. 136(A)) have a fluctuation start action period Tb1, which is an execution period, of approximately 1.5 seconds (fluctuation start action period Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds), and are made up of approximately 45 frames of images. The decorative pattern fluctuation stop actions B1-B3 (see FIG. 136(B)) have a fluctuation stop action period Tb2, which is an execution period, of approximately 0.8 seconds (fluctuation stop action period Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds), and are made up of approximately 28 frames of images. The decorative pattern loop actions C1-C4 (see FIG. 136(C)) have a loop action period Tb3, which is one cycle, of approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds), and are made up of approximately 55 frames of images.

Also, as shown in FIG. 137(B), the movable body lamps 9d provided on the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, and the main lamps 9a and frame lamps 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3, emit light based on the loop light emission control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the gaming state is in a low base state.

In this loop light emission control, for example, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in that order over a loop light emission period Tb4, which is one cycle, and after the loop light emission period Tb4 ends, the light returns to "white", and then during the loop light emission period Tb4 again, the light is emitted in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow", and this is repeated periodically. In other words, in the loop light emission control, the light emissions of "white", "blue", and "yellow" are executed periodically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3 < loop light emission period Tb4). By doing this, in the low base state, the loop action is repeatedly performed to encourage the player to change the display of decorative symbols, while in the high base state, where variable display is easier to execute than in the low base state, excessive encouragement of variable display, which can be perceived as annoying, can be prevented. Also, since the loop action is repeatedly performed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, the decorative symbols can be made to stand out in an optimal manner.

In the present embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified as a form in which the lights "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted periodically, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, a light emission pattern in which the lights are emitted in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow", followed by "yellow", "white", and "blue", may be cyclically performed, or a light emission pattern in which four or more colors are emitted in sequence may be cyclically performed.

The various actions of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 137(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first or second presentation mode, but are not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third or fourth presentation mode. Also, the loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in FIG. 137(B) is executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first or second presentation mode, but is not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third or fourth presentation mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold display will be described with reference to Fig. 138. In Fig. 138, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation of the hold display.

As shown in FIG. 138 (A1), when waiting to play (number of reserved memories "0"), no reserved display is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5. The special reserved memory display area 5U consists of four display areas, the first display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, the second display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-4".

As shown in FIG. 138 (A2), when a start winning (e.g., the first start winning) occurs during game standby, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U. Next, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upwards to the left (see FIG. 138 (A3)), then moves diagonally downwards to the left in a parabolic arc towards the active display area 5F, and when it reaches the active display area 5F it is enlarged and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 138 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 138 (A2), when a start winning occurs, the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but when the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the variable display of the small pattern begins in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 138 (A4), the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U has not moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103; in other words, the shift display has not ended. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative patterns starts before the shift display has ended, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period ends, during which the display is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103.Then, the aforementioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (B1), when the decorative pattern is being variably displayed and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the special reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved display 002SG101 in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

As shown in FIG. 138 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. In this way, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of a variable display and the start of the next one, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the presentation. Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 allows the player to recognize that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, while the display of a new active display 002SG103 allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has started.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left (see FIG. 138 (B3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic manner toward the active display area 5F, and by moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, it is switched to be displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 138 (B4)).

In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left starts to move horizontally to the left (see FIG. 138 (B3)) in conjunction with the movement of the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left, and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 138 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 138 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased with the end of the variable display, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has not yet moved to the active display area 5F as shown in FIG. 138 (B3). However, at the point when the moving display of the first pending display 002SG101 starts, the variable display of the small pattern starts in response to the variable display of the special pattern.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 138 (B4), the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U has not finished moving (shifting display) to the active display area 5F, so if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts in this state, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, until the end of the reserved shift display period in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103, the aforementioned variable start action is executed before the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the reserved shift display period ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special chart reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are common to the first to fourth presentation modes, so the shift display shown in FIG. 138 is executed in a common manner in the first to fourth presentation modes. However, for example, if a special chart reserved memory display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each presentation mode are provided, it may be possible to execute a shift display in a manner corresponding to each presentation mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 138, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in an operating mode (for example, a mode in which the hold display moves in a mountain-shaped trajectory from the special chart hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F) that is common to multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns, etc.), but it may also be possible to execute shift displays of multiple types of operating modes corresponding to each fluctuation pattern and each presentation mode. Also, it may be possible to execute a shift display in which the operating mode differs depending on whether the game state is in a low base state or a high base state.

In addition, the operating modes common to multiple types of change patterns in the shift display include those in which at least one of multiple elements such as the display mode, display speed, and shift display period until the pending display is switched to the active display and displayed is common.

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special chart pending memory display area 5U, and then the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is moved (shifted) from the special chart pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of pending memories is "0", when a start winning occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special chart pending memory display area 5U, and the active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the active display area 5F.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a switching display (shift display) that switches the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the active display in response to the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the first reserved display 002SG101 is non-linearly (for example, in a mountain shape) moved from the first display area from the left in the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be moved linearly to the left. In addition, the switching display (shift display) is not limited to a sliding display of the reserved display, but may be a display that erases the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, and starts displaying the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described based on Fig. 139 to Fig. 148. Fig. 139 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of the decorative pattern in the first performance mode. Fig. 140 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of the decorative pattern following Fig. 139. Fig. 141 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of the decorative pattern in the second performance mode. Fig. 142 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of the decorative pattern following Fig. 141. Fig. 143 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of variable display of the decorative pattern in Fig. 141. Fig. 144 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of the decorative pattern as modified example 1. Fig. 145 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of the decorative pattern following Fig. 144. Fig. 146 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of the decorative pattern in the third performance mode. Fig. 147 is a diagram for explaining the appearance of the decorative pattern. Fig. 148 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of the decorative pattern in the fourth performance mode.

In the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (e.g., dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not indicate images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns is started in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 139 and 140.

Figure 139 (A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the first performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory number "2").

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 139(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small pattern starts, while the decorative pattern change start action (see FIG. 136(A)) starts in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 139(D)). In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 139(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 139(D)).

The erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 139(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 139(E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the upward action A4 begins, and when the upward movement (action A4) ends, a downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 139(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and the upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, a downward movement begins, and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 139(G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C end, and the upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, a downward movement begins, and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 139(H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts and the variable display of the small pattern starts, the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R, and middle decorative pattern display area starts, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the first reserved display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the player can seamlessly recognize that the variable display based on the reserved display has started. Also, from when the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, so the player can recognize that the variable display has started.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figure 139 (F) (G), the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is slow immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figure 139 (H), and then goes through the medium speed shown in Figure 139 (H), and then to the high speed shown in Figure 140 (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so at high speeds, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Also, as shown in Figures 139 (G) to 140 (K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, then speed up through medium speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency increases with acceleration.

(Example of variable display operation in the second presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns is started in the second presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 141 and 142.

Figure 141 (A) shows the state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the second performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. Also, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory number "2"). Also, in the second performance mode, the name of the decorative symbol information display section 002SG053 is always hidden, even when the decorative symbols are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 141(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small pattern starts, while the decorative pattern change start action (see FIG. 136(A)) starts in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 141(D)). In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 141(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 141(D)).

The erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 141(B) continues to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 141(E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the retreat action A4 begins, and when the retreat movement (action A4) to the back of the display screen ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 141(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and the backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 141(G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C end, and the backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 141(H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts and the variable display of the small pattern starts, the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R, and middle decorative pattern display area starts, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the first reserved display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the player can seamlessly recognize that the variable display based on the reserved display has started. Also, from when the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, so the player can recognize that the variable display has started.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and at high speeds, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figure 141 (F) (G), the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is slow immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figure 141 (H), and then goes through the medium speed shown in Figure 141 (H), and then to the high speed shown in Figure 142 (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so at high speeds, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Also, as shown in Figures 141 (G) to 142 (K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, then speed up through medium speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency increases with acceleration.

In this way, the scroll display in the second presentation mode is configured to move and disappear while increasing the transmittance (transparency) from the back of the screen to the front. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 143 (A) and (B), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the back to the front, so that, between the time when a decorative pattern is displayed in frame-in and the time when it is displayed out of frame in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") that is positioned so as to overlap part of one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") on the back side may be visible through decorative pattern "2". At this time, the character in the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number in the number display section 002SG051 ("3") is difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in FIG. 143 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number in the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" ("3") is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" located behind the first decorative pattern "2" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "2". In this case, the other decorative pattern "3" located behind displays a character in its character display unit 002SG052 while not displaying a number in its number display unit 002SG051, and the decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This prevents the number "2" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "3" from being displayed overlapping each other, preventing the "2" of the decorative pattern located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 143(A), the decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a frame-in manner, and then is displayed in a frame-out manner, as shown in FIG. 143(C), while moving and disappearing while increasing the transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as described above, the decorative pattern is displayed in a fade-out manner in proportion to the increase in the display speed, so while fading out according to the display speed, it moves from the back of the screen to the front while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Therefore, from the start of the scrolling display until the high-speed display, it looks like FIG. 143(A) to FIG. 143(C), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative pattern even at the back of the screen.

(Example of Operation of Variable Display as Modification 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to Figures 144 and 145. In this Modification 1, the decorative symbols are scrolled in a curved manner as in the second performance mode, but they move in the opposite direction to the second mode, that is, from the front side of the screen to the back side.

The flow in Figures 144(A) to 144(D) is similar to that in Figures 141(A) to 141(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 144(E), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moving to the active display area 5F ends, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the backward action A4 begins, and when the forward movement (action A4) toward the front of the display screen ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 144(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 144(G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 144(H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts and the variable display of the small pattern starts, the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R, and middle decorative pattern display area starts, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the first reserved display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the player can seamlessly recognize that the variable display based on the reserved display has started. Also, from when the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, so the player can recognize that the variable display has started.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and at high speeds, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figure 144 (F) (G), the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is slow immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figure 144 (F) (G), and then goes through the medium speed shown in Figure 144 (H) to the high speed shown in Figure 145 (I) (J) (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so at high speeds, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Also, as shown in Figures 144 (G) to 145 (K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the variable display begins, then at a medium speed and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scroll display as variant 1 is a mode in which the decorative pattern moves and disappears while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the front side of the screen to the back side. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (G) (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side. Therefore, between the time when a decorative pattern is framed in and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time when it is framed out, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") that is positioned so as to overlap part of one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") on the back side may become visible through the decorative pattern "3". At this time, the character in the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located behind the first decorative pattern "3" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "3". In this case, the other decorative pattern "2" located behind displays a character in its character display unit 002SG052 while not displaying a number in its number display unit 002SG051, and the decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This prevents the number "3" of the first decorative pattern from overlapping with the other decorative pattern "2", preventing the "3" of the decorative pattern located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a frame-in manner, and then in a frame-out manner, while increasing their transmittance (transparency), and are then erased. However, at the start of the variable display, as described above, the decorative patterns are displayed in a fade-out manner in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and therefore, while fading out in accordance with the display speed, they are moved from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency). Therefore, from the start of the scrolling display until the high-speed display is achieved, it appears as shown in Figures 144(F) to 144(H), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display is achieved, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative patterns even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns is started in the third presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 146 and 147.

Figure 146 (A) shows the state in which the decorative symbols that were rotating in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the third performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory number "2"). In addition, the small symbols and the right hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 146(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, but since it is in a high base state, the decorative symbol change start action (see FIG. 136(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 146(D)). In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 146(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 146(D)).

The erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 146(B) continues to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 146 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins. In the high base state, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R starts all at once, but the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the rotation display starts after the first reserved display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on the reserved display has begun.

In addition, when the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate, the rotation display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 146(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, as shown in Figure 146(G), and then move to the medium speed shown in Figure 146(H). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so at high speeds it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 147, the rotating display in the third presentation mode rotates the decorative pattern to repeatedly display it on the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b, and the decorative pattern is semi-transparent during the rotating display and becomes non-transparent when the rotating display stops. During the rotating display, the number display section 002SG051 on the first surface 5a of the decorative pattern that is semi-transparent is displayed, while the number display section 002SG051 on the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 147(A), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a slow speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transparency is the first transparency, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is in a state where the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a can be seen, but the number "437" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the second surface 5b, is difficult to see.

Also, as shown in FIG. 147(B), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a medium speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transmittance is a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are in a state where the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b can be seen, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse surface, the first surface 5a, is difficult to see.

Also, as shown in FIG. 147(C), in a semi-transparent state in which the decorative patterns are displayed at a high speed and have a third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are in a state in which the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult to see, and the number "874" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the second surface 5b, is difficult to see. Note that both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during the high speed rotation display.

In this way, when rotating the decorative pattern to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, so not only the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) but also the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) of the decorative pattern can be seen through. In this case, the numbers on the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) are displayed, while the numbers on the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) are not displayed, so the numbers on the front side and the back side of the decorative pattern do not overlap and the numbers on the front side are prevented from becoming difficult to understand. Also, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in the high base state, the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 137(B)) corresponding to the background pattern, and this simplifies the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d.

(Example of variable display operation in the fourth presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns begins in the fourth presentation mode will be described with reference to Figure 148.

Figure 148 (A) shows the state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolled in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the fourth performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory number "2"). In addition, the small symbols and the right hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 136 (A))

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 148(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, but since it is in a high base state, the decorative symbol change start action (see FIG. 136(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 148(D)). In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 148(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 148(D)).

The erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 148(B) continues to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 148 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a frozen state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R starts all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display begins after the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on the pending display has begun.

In addition, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and at high speeds a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 148(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, and then move through the medium speed shown in Figure 148(G) to the high speed shown in Figure 148(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in response to the start of variable display, it performs an action to start varying the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display ends, which switches the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and a variable start action is performed to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is being performed, making it possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the shift display. Also, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is being performed in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and can perform a common shift display when a variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command). This allows a common shift display to be performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, thereby reducing the number of shift display patterns.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in response to the start of the variable display, the CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance does not perform an action to start changing the decorative pattern when the pending shift display is being performed in response to the start of the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when the CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in response to the start of the variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and a variable start action is performed to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is being performed, making it possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the shift display. Also, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is being performed in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state.

Even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be performed when a variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command). This allows a common shift display to be performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, thereby reducing the number of shift display patterns.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 155 and 156, a form has been exemplified in which, when the variable display of a special pattern begins, the shift display for switching the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, and then the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in any one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center begins after the shift display for switching the reserved display corresponding to the variable display ends, when the variable display of a special pattern begins, the scrolling display of any one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is being performed.

(Example of operation of each part when a symbol stops being displayed)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the symbols stop will be described with reference to Figs. 149 to 153. Fig. 149 is a diagram showing the flow of the display of the stopped decorative symbols in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 150 is a diagram showing the flow of the display of the stopped decorative symbols following Fig. 149. Figs. 151 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of the display of the stopped decorative symbols when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Figs. 152 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the display of the stopped decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode).

(Example of the operation of the stop display of the first performance mode [reserved memory number "2 or less"])
First, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stop state in the variable display based on the miss variable pattern when the reserved memory number is 2 or less in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 149 and 150. Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 149 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for the stopped display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 149 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopping position of the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 149(C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged (see FIG. 149(D)), after which a variable stop action (see FIG. 136(B)) is executed to restore the character to its original size (see FIG. 149(E)). Then, in the temporarily stopped state, a loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is started, and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special pattern is completed.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 149(F), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see FIG. 149(F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopping position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 149(G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged (see FIG. 149(H)), after which a variable stop action (see FIG. 136(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see FIG. 150(I)). Then, in the temporarily stopped state, a loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is started, and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special pattern is completed.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 150 (J), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 150 (K)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopping position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 150(K)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged (see FIG. 150(L)), after which a variable stop action (see FIG. 136(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see FIG. 150(M)). Then, in the temporarily stopped state, a loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is started, and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special pattern is completed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as still, the loop action of the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as still in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ends and they are displayed as still, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 150 (M)).

(Example of the operation of the stop display of the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "3"])
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state in the variable display when the reserved memory number is 3 in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 151 (A) to (G). Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 151 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for the stopped display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 151 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 151(C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 136(B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 151 (D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 149(E)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 136(B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 151 (F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 151(G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 136(B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as still, the loop action of the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as still in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ends and they are displayed as still, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 151 (G)).

(Example of the stop display of symbols in the fourth performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static manner in the variable display in the fourth performance mode will be described with reference to Fig. 152 (A) and (B). Note that the third performance mode is almost the same as the fourth performance mode except for the background image, so a detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 152 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R that were being displayed at high speed decreases all at once, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of each decorative pattern (see Figure 152 (B)).

The left, center, and right decorative patterns are then simultaneously displayed in a provisionally stopped state at the stop positions of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transparency of the decorative patterns becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 136(B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) after the provisionally stopped display is not executed either.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as still, the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as still in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as still, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 152 (C)).

In this way, in a low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is two or less and a variable display based on an abbreviated variable pattern is executed), the variable stop action adds variety to the movement of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped, enhancing interest, whereas in a low base state when the number of reserved memories is three, or in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, when a variable display based on abbreviated variable patterns is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variable stop action is not executed, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size, allowing it to be stopped without compromising its visibility.

In this embodiment, the data of animation (moving images) of various movements of the decorative patterns can be created by combining materials for each period, such as 1. from the start of the variable display to just before the high-speed variable display, 2. high-speed variable display, 3. low-speed variable display to stop of the variable display, and 4. stopped pattern. However, for 2. high-speed variable display, as shown in Figures 133 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transmittance of the decorative patterns is high and they are almost transparent, so that while it is possible to recognize the state of the variable display at high speed, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative patterns have passed by (represented by arrows in Figures 133 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). Therefore, even if there is high-speed variable display animation data for each type of decorative pattern (a type corresponding to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), this would not be meaningful and would only take up space in ROM 121, so it is preferable that common data be used for the high-speed variable display animation data regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change)
Next, an example of the background change will be described with reference to Fig. 153 to Fig. 154. Fig. 153 shows (A1) the first background image, (A2) the first predetermined background image, and (B) an explanatory diagram of the background change. Fig. 154 shows the flow of the background change in the first presentation mode.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the first presentation mode, the background image can be switched between a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153 (A1)), which shows a daytime cityscape seen from afar, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153 (A2)), which shows a daytime cityscape. The background image is switched when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when an SP reach miss occurs) is met. In this embodiment, the switching is performed at a predetermined timing in the next variable display after an SP reach miss (for example, when the variable display starts).

In the present embodiment, the first presentation mode is exemplified by switching between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and although not particularly shown, it may be possible to selectively switch between and display three or more types of background images including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. In addition, the establishment of the switching condition is not limited to the above, and may be established when a specific presentation other than SP Reach is executed, when one background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time, or when selected by the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be any timing during the variable display period, such as before the decorative pattern reaches a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 153(B), when the first background image 002SG081 is switched to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or when the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is switched to the first background image 002SG081), a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 displayed at 100% opacity is gradually increased and erased, while a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is hidden at 0% opacity, is gradually decreased. In other words, a cross-fade display is executed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1). The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 last, for example, about 6 seconds, during which about 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 154(A), when the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, its transmittance (transparency) increases over time, making it difficult to see (see FIG. 154(B)), while the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A displayed in the layer below the first background image 002SG081 decreases, and it gradually becomes visible (see FIG. 154(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases further while the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see FIG. 154 (D) (E)). Finally, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 becomes 100% and it is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0%, making it easily visible (see FIG. 154 (F)).

In the present embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a portion of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example has been given in which the transmittance always increases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded out, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded in, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance in the fade-out or fade-in display of the background image is not necessarily limited to an increase or decrease at a constant rate; for example, the transmittance may increase or decrease slowly in a first period, and then increase or decrease rapidly in a second period.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the background image is switched in one presentation mode (for example, the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode), but the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to a form in which the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is switched to a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, and to a form in which the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display period of the second background image are synchronized.

(Example of operation of each part during variable display)
Next, examples of the operation of each part in the variable display in each presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 155 to 158. Fig. 155 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the first presentation mode. Fig. 156 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the second presentation mode. Fig. 157 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. Fig. 158 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of the variable display in (A) the first presentation mode, (B) the second presentation mode, and (C) the third and fourth presentation modes.

(First performance mode)
As shown in Fig. 155, in the first performance mode, when the reserved memory number is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are displayed at high speed with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the scroll display is started after the variable start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the reserved display is shifted, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see Fig. 158 (A)).

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of the variable display, a fade-out display is started in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display is started in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases and becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in that order. Also, during the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small patterns are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative patterns ends and they are stopped and displayed. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed and the next variable display can start.

The fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be scrolled and displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21).

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B21 from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the scroll display is temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly execute a light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 137(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Also, background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second presentation mode)
Next, as shown in Fig. 156, in the second performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are displayed at high speed with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the scroll display is started after the variable start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. Also, the shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see Fig. 158 (B)).

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A22 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of the variable display, a fade-out display is started in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display is started in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases and becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in that order. Also, during the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small patterns are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative patterns ends and they are stopped and displayed. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can start.

The fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to a longer period than the fade-out display period A22 from when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R begins until they are displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A22). In this way, since the fade-out display basically gives the impression of having disappeared suddenly the shorter the period in which it is performed, for fade-out displays that may be performed at the same time when the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change occur (for example, when the variable display begins), the fade-out display of the decorative pattern is performed in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R to when the display is temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B22). In this way, since the fade-in display basically gives the impression of appearing suddenly the shorter the period in which it is performed, for fade-in displays that may be performed at the same time when the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change occur (for example, when the variable display is stopped), the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, drawing attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 158 (A) and (B)). By doing this, not only does the second presentation mode differ in the manner in which the scroll display of the decorative pattern is performed compared to the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period A22 from when the scroll display starts until the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see as the display speed increases is longer, so that the decorative pattern can be noticed for a longer period of time.

In this embodiment, as a variable display of the decorative pattern in the second presentation mode, a second scroll display that moves in a curved manner in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front is used as a special variable display different from the first scroll display that moves in a straight line from top to bottom in the first presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable display different from the first scroll display is not limited to the above-mentioned one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front, but may be various scroll displays such as one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the front to the back as described in the first variation example, or one that moves in a straight line or curved line from bottom to top.

Furthermore, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 are different when the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and when the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. By doing this, the fade-out display period is the same despite the different presentation modes, making it difficult for the player to predict that the determined fluctuation pattern is the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern PA1-1, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is different from the fade-out display period A22 from when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R begins until they are displayed at high speed. In other words, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun. In more detail, if the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 would disappear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun. Therefore, by erasing the decorative pattern first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is different from the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. In other words, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A will appear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly execute a light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 137(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Also, background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third and fourth performance modes)
Next, as shown in Fig. 157, in the third and fourth performance modes, when the variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating or scrolling all at once without performing a variable start action. Also, the pending display is shifted, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts (see Fig. 158(C)).

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually decelerate all at once and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing the patterns to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action as in the first and second presentation modes are not executed, and the variable display ends as is, and the decorative symbols are displayed statically together with the small symbols. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when a scroll display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when a rotating display is performed in the third presentation mode or a scroll display is performed in the fourth presentation mode, and the fade-out display period A22 when a scroll display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when a scroll display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 158 (A) to (C)).

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are illuminated in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high bass music based on the light emission control corresponding to the high bass music pattern. In addition, the high bass music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in the high base state, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are exemplified as being illuminated in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high base music based on the light emission control corresponding to the high base music pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in the high base state, the light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in order based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 137(B)) corresponding to the background pattern, and background BGM may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, the light emission control of the performance control CPU 120 can be simplified.

(Example of customer waiting demo performance)
Next, the customer waiting demo performance will be described with reference to Fig. 159 to Fig. 160. Fig. 159 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo performance. Fig. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a start winning occurs during the customer waiting demo performance.

As shown in FIG. 159, the "waiting for customers demo effect" is an effect that notifies the user that the machine is in a waiting for customers (waiting to play) state, and is started by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving a waiting for customers demo designation command output from the main board 11 without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the movable bodies 32A, 32B, etc. is executed in the initial operation control process, and then the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 159(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on without any variable display being performed, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is hidden, the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see FIG. 159(B)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after a moving image is displayed that sequentially introduces the multiple friendly characters (which may include enemy character images) that appear in various performances and the contents of the content (see FIG. 159 (B) to (E)), an image of a group of friendly characters is still displayed (see FIG. 159 (F)), the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, it rises back to the origin position (see FIG. 159 (G) to (H)), and the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the performance ends (see FIG. 159 (I)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 159 (J)).

When a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be repeatedly performed multiple times in the standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times. The performance mode of the customer waiting demo performance as a standby performance is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, during the execution period of the customer waiting demo performance (see Figures 159 (B) to (H)), small symbols are continuously displayed in a static state in the display area 5S, while decorative symbols are hidden in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, by displaying small symbols even when decorative symbols are not displayed, the player can be made aware that the variable display is in a static state.

Here is an example of the operation that occurs when a start winning occurs while such a customer waiting demo performance is being performed.

As shown in FIG. 160(A), when the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, if the first start winning occurs (the condition to start the variable display is met), the variable display of small symbols starts in the display area 5S while the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 160(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and decorative patterns are displayed frozen in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U. Then, the first reserved display 002SG101 starts moving (shifting) from the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F, and the change start action of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts in the order of left, right, and center.

As shown in Figure 160 (D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in Figure 160 (E), the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R move upward in sequence, the change start action ends, and the scrolling display begins (see Figure 160 (F)).

In this way, if a start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, the variable display of small symbols begins before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 becomes invisible, then the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 becomes invisible and switches to the background image corresponding to the performance mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode), and then the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display begins.

In other words, if the scroll display of the decorative symbols is started while the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is still displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the small symbols, switching from the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starting the scroll display after the shift display of the reserved display ends, the player can be made to recognize that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scroll display is started after the shift display ends, the time lag from the occurrence of the first start winning to the start of the scroll display becomes large, so for the small symbols, the variable display starts before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 goes invisible, so the display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols can be guaranteed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 159(A), (I), and (J), when the customer waiting demo performance ends and the decorative symbols are displayed frozen in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, if the first or second performance mode is selected, a loop action (see Fig. 136(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is executed, and loop light emission control (see Fig. 137(B)) is executed in the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. On the other hand, if the third or fourth performance mode is selected, the loop action (see Fig. 136(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is not executed, and light emission control is executed in the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d in accordance with the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music.

In this way, in a low base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is repeatedly executed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, which draws attention to the decorative symbols, thereby encouraging the variable display of the decorative symbols, i.e., resumption of play, while in a high base state, neither the loop action of the decorative symbols nor the loop light emission control is executed, which draws attention to the fact that a presentation during a high base (third presentation mode or fourth presentation mode) is being executed. It is not necessary to execute the loop action of the decorative symbols in the first presentation mode or second presentation mode, and it is also possible to execute the loop action of the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode or fourth presentation mode.

In addition, the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state because it is unlikely that the player will end the game in the high base state, and it is more likely that the player will simply leave their seat. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a non-operating state without a variable display, and by appealing with the loop action, other players are prevented from accidentally sitting down.

In addition, the "loop action" of this embodiment is focused on "movement," but for example, the decorative pattern will not change position, sway, or deform, but may instead have an animation in which a highlight moves around the decorative pattern while it remains stationary, causing it to sparkle.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and performance images (not shown) such as character images displayed as background images in the high base state may be animated, such as moving the background images in time with the high base music or at a predetermined moving speed. In this case, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state as described above, the loop action of the decorative pattern is not executed, but the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 may continue.

(Example of pseudo consecutive announcement)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive announcement will be described based on Fig. 161 to Fig. 162. Fig. 161 is a diagram showing the flow of the pseudo consecutive announcement. Fig. 162 is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo consecutive number of times display and the pattern color, (B) a diagram showing the types of the pseudo consecutive number of times display and the pattern color, and (C) a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number of times display color decision table.

As shown in FIG. 161, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is a presentation that teases whether or not the variable display will be resumed after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the derived display of the display result, i.e., whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays.

As shown in FIG. 162(A), the pseudo consecutive prediction can be executed in two patterns: a "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" in which the initial variable display and one re-variable display result in a total variable display count of 2, and a "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" in which the initial variable display and two re-variable displays result in a total variable display count of 3. When the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 1 pattern) variable pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" is executed, and when the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 2 pattern) variable pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" is executed. Note that the probability of winning is higher with the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" than with the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern."

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161(A), when a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive prediction is started, a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display was started, and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, entering a reach state (see FIG. 161(B)), and then a pseudo consecutive decorative pattern with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 161(C)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 161 (D)), and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" indicating that the first re-variable display will start, that is, the second variable display will start, is displayed above the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 161 (F)), and the variable display of the decoration pattern is resumed in the left decoration pattern display area 5L, the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, and the right decoration pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 161 (G)). Note that in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive pattern passes the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, and the decoration pattern with a number one larger than the temporary stopped decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the left and right decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C, and the variable display result of a miss is displayed (see FIG. 161 (E)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed in Figure 161 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-consecutive one-time pattern," after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped (see Figure 161 (L)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 161 (M)), and the performance progresses to a SP reach.

In addition, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed in FIG. 161 (G), in the case of a pseudo consecutive prediction of a "pseudo consecutive two times pattern," a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and then a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, once again entering a reach state, and then a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before the stopping position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 161 (H)).

Next, the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 161(I)), and the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213 of "x3" is displayed above the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 161(J)), indicating that the second re-variable display will begin, that is, the third variable display will begin, and then the variable display of the decoration patterns is resumed in the left decoration pattern display area 5L, middle decoration pattern display area 5C, and right decoration pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 161(K)).

After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed temporarily stopped (see Figure 161 (L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach state (see Figure 161 (M)), and the SP reach performance develops.

The pseudo consecutive announcement includes an introductory part that teases whether or not the variable display will resume (see Fig. 161 (A)-(C), (G), (J), (K), (L)), and a result notification part that notifies the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed (see Fig. 161 (D)-(F), (H), (I), (M)).

As shown in FIG. 162 (B1), in the pseudo consecutive prediction, after the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, when the variable display is resumed, a pseudo consecutive number of times display is displayed that can specify the number of times the variable display has been resumed. Specifically, a pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG212 (see FIG. 161 (F) (G)) of "x2" indicating that the first re-variable display will start, that is, the second variable display will start, and a pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213 (see FIG. 161 (J) (K)) of "x3" indicating that the second re-variable display will start, that is, the third variable display will start are displayed.

The pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 162 (B1) and the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 162 (B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes displayed in red. Also, as explained in FIG. 132, the color is "blue" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "red" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. The display color of such pseudo consecutive number of times display is determined using the pseudo consecutive number of times display color determination table shown in FIG. 162 (C) in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 in the variable display number setting process explained in FIG. 131.

Specifically, when the display color of the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG212 is determined in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, if the variable display result is a "probable jackpot", a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is blue) is determined 10% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are red) is determined 90% of the time.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "non-certain jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are red) is determined at a rate of 70%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "miss," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number display color is blue) is determined 90% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number display color are red) is determined 10% of the time.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive win prediction, there are cases where the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a first combination of non-same colors, and cases where the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a second combination of the same color, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in the pseudo consecutive win prediction.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color blue is determined as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive runs is higher than the rate at which the non-same color red is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color blue is determined as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive runs is lower than the rate at which the non-same color red is determined.

In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color red is determined as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive runs is higher than the rate at which the non-same color blue is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss, and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color red is determined as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive runs is lower than the rate at which the non-same color blue is determined.

Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, when a normal pattern ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 162 (B1)), for the first pseudo-consecutive in which pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 is "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the provisionally stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 have the same number and display color, blue, is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the provisionally stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 have the same number but display color, red.

In addition, for the second pseudo-consecutive win, in which the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 is "x3", the third combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, blue, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 are different and the display color is red.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, and the normal pattern ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive and second pseudo-consecutive is lower than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined.

When the variable display result is a jackpot, and a sure-win pattern ("3", red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo-consecutive in which the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 is "x2", the third combination ("x2", red) in which the provisionally stopped decorative pattern and the numbers in the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, red, is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the provisionally stopped decorative pattern and the numbers in the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 are different and the display color is blue.

In addition, for the second pseudo-consecutive win, in which the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 is "x3", the second combination ("x3", red) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are the same type is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x3", blue) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number of the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are the same type but the display color is different, blue.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, and the normal pattern ("3", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive and second pseudo-consecutive is lower than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, there are cases where the numbers of the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213 are the same type, but the display colors of the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary stop and the pseudo consecutive number display are different, resulting in a first combination, and cases where the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers and display colors of the pseudo consecutive number display are both the same type, resulting in a second combination.By this, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in the pseudo consecutive prediction, and not only can you focus on whether the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, but if it is executed, you can also focus on the combination of the numbers of the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213, which increases the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, since the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo consecutives is determined as the fluctuation pattern than when a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo consecutive is determined, by making it higher the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state when the decorative pattern provisionally stopped in the second pseudo consecutive and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive count display are the same type of second combination than when both the decorative pattern provisionally stopped in the first pseudo consecutive and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive count display are the same type of second combination, it is possible to draw attention to the number of pseudo consecutive executions and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive count display.

In addition, if the decorative pattern displayed as a provisional stop and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive number display during the second pseudo consecutive turn are the same type of second combination, the decorative pattern becomes a probability variable pattern, so the probability of being controlled to a probability variable jackpot game state may be higher when a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo consecutive turns is determined as the fluctuation pattern than when a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo consecutive turn is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display is determined to be one of multiple colors depending on the number of decorative patterns displayed in a temporary stop state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display may be a display color that is predetermined for each pseudo consecutive number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG212, 002SG213 is exemplified as "x2" or "x3", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive number of times display can be changed to various modes as long as the pseudo consecutive number of times can be specified, and can be displayed in various modes such as "nth consecutive time" (n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth time", "nth re-change", etc.

In the present embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive hits display in the pseudo consecutive hits prediction are the same type and color in two patterns: when the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop is a normal pattern ("2", blue) and the pseudo consecutive hits display 002SG212 ("x2", blue), and when the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop is a normal pattern ("3", red) and the pseudo consecutive hits display 002SG213 (x3, red). However, in addition to the above, there may be other patterns such as when the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop is a normal pattern ("4", green) and the pseudo consecutive hits display (x4, green), and the color of the numbers of the decorative pattern, the color of the numbers of the pseudo consecutive hits display, and the number of pseudo consecutive hits can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the number of the decorative pattern displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive wins displayed, it is determined whether or not the pseudo consecutive win count display color will be the same color as the number of the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop, and the expectation level is higher if the same color is determined than if it is determined to be a non-same color. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the number of the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive wins displayed, the pseudo consecutive win count display color may not be determined, and may be uniformly determined to a predetermined display color (for example, white, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive announcement, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R to enter a reach state, and then a pseudo consecutive decorative pattern with the word "NEXT!" displayed on the surface is temporarily displayed at a stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C to start the re-variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo consecutive decorative pattern can be changed in various ways. Also, after a decorative pattern with a different number from the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L or the right decorative pattern display area 5R, or the pseudo consecutive decorative pattern, may be temporarily displayed at a stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C to start the re-variable display.

The decorative symbols provisionally displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R during the pseudo consecutive prediction do not necessarily have to be the same as the final decorative symbols that are provisionally displayed when the variable display ends. For example, after a normal symbol is provisionally displayed in the first pseudo consecutive, a special symbol may be provisionally displayed in the second pseudo consecutive, that is, a symbol different from the first pseudo consecutive. The number of pseudo consecutive times is not limited to the above two times, and pseudo consecutive times (re-variable display) may be possible three or more times.

(Example of reach effect operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the reach performance will be described with reference to Figs. 163 to 165. Fig. 163 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach performance. Fig. 164 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach performance following Fig. 163. Fig. 165 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the reach performance. Note that, although an example of the operation of the reach performance in the first performance mode will be described below, similar reach performances may also be executable in the second to fourth performance modes.

As shown in FIG. 163(A), when a variable display based on a normal reach variable pattern or a super reach variable pattern is started, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display was started (see FIG. 163(B)), and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode, and the reach performance is started (see FIG. 163(C)). At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed at high speed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C. In addition, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the above-mentioned loop light emission control (see FIG. 137(B)).

Note that in Figures 163 (B) and (C), a form in which the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are temporarily displayed in that order is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and decorative patterns may be temporarily displayed simultaneously in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R.

As shown in FIG. 163(D), when the reach performance begins, the decorative patterns temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed as a reach line suggestion image superimposed on the decorative pattern (which is almost transparent and invisible) being variably displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and the reach line suggestion performance begins. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line that connects the decorative patterns temporarily stopped at the stopping positions of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and is a display that suggests that the decorative pattern in the center decorative pattern display area 5C will be stopped and displayed on the reach line.

In FIG. 163(D), the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5R are not just enlarged and displayed as the character in the character display section 002SG052, as in the variable stop action described above, but the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053 and base display section 002SG054 which form the decorative pattern are all enlarged and displayed at the same ratio. In this way, by displaying an enlarged display in a different manner from when the variable display is stopped, it can be recognized that the variable display has not stopped, but has entered a reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 163(D), when the reach performance starts, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed small near the stopping position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C so as to overlap with the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and then gradually extends linearly toward the stopping positions (left and right direction) of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R (see FIG. 163(E)). After reaching the left and right sides of the display screen (see FIG. 163(F)), the appearance changes so that the vertical dimensions expand (see FIG. 163(G)), and the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases due to a fade-out display (see FIG. 163(H)), and finally it is erased and becomes invisible (see FIG. 164(I)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 163 (F), in the reach line suggestion performance, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (enlarge the display), and when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off, so that the periphery of the display screen becomes darker than usual, making the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out more.

As shown in FIG. 163(D), after the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative pattern starts moving to the left and the right decorative pattern starts moving to the right, that is, in the direction moving away from each other (see FIG. 163(E)). Also, while moving away from each other, they rotate a predetermined angle around a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction (see FIG. 163(F)), and when they reach the farthest position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotation display ends and they are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 163(G)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 163(H), the left and right decorative patterns that were displayed enlarged at the left and right separated positions are reduced in size and rotated while moving from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and are restored to their normal display positions.

Then, as shown in Figure 164 (I), when the decorative patterns are restored to the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and hidden, the decorative patterns that were variably displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C are faded in as the scroll display speed gradually decreases and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases (see Figures 164 (J) to (K)), and finally the transmittance of the decorative patterns becomes 0% (opaque) and they are scrolled at a slow speed (see Figure 164 (L)).

As shown in FIG. 165, when executing a reach line suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and a separation display that separates the decorative patterns after executing the enlarged display. The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1), allowing the player to recognize the decorative patterns that form the reach state.

In addition, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative pattern is restored to its original state (td2<tf1), so the player can be made aware of the decorative pattern that forms the reach state, and when restored, it can be quickly reduced in size to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged, the left-right dimension of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, where attention is focused on which decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, narrows, making it difficult to visually confirm the variable display of the decorative patterns. Therefore, by performing a moving display that separates the left and right decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns that have reached a reach state are emphasized by the enlarged display, and then attention is quickly drawn to the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

In addition, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is exemplified as being displayed immediately after the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be displayed at the same time as the reach state is reached.

In addition, the movable body lamp 9d is shown as being turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing after the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lamp may be turned off at the same time as the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Also, it is not limited to being turned off, and the brightness may be reduced compared to when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body lamp 9d built into the movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5 is used as a specific light-emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific light-emitting means is not limited to a lamp provided on a movable body that can operate as described above as long as it is provided around the image display device 5. For example, it may be a plurality of board side lamps including an attacca lamp 9c provided on the game board, or a main lamp 9a or a frame lamp 9b provided on the game machine frame 3. In particular, if the lamp is provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made to stand out by turning it off.

In addition, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the timing at which the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2, which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, so that the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

In addition, in this embodiment, the transmittance of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display) after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 almost at the same time as the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, or the transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

(Example of SP reach performance)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP reach performance will be described with reference to Fig. 166 to Fig. 168. Fig. 166 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach performance. Fig. 167 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach performance following Fig. 166. Fig. 168 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 166(A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to the low base state, after the reach state described in FIG. 163(C) is reached, the reach title display 002SG070 indicating the type of SP reach performance is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a notification performance to notify whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 166(B) and (C)). In the SP reach performance, a fifth background image 002SG085 that represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed, which is different from the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082 that are normal background images. Note that the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image with a different form depending on the type of SP reach performance.

Next, the game starts by displaying an operation prompt display 002SG071, consisting of the text "PRESS!!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, and a button display 002SG072 that resembles the push button 31B, for a period of time from when the battle is concluded until the specified operation valid period has elapsed (see FIG. 166 (D)).

When the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color while the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, the effect display 002SG073 that highlights the movable body 32B is displayed, a specified performance sound effect is output, and the game is notified that it has been controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 166 (E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, a combination of symbols that confirms a big win (e.g., "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed while a fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 166 (F)).

As shown in FIG. 166(G), as the SP Reach performance ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a big win (for example, "222") is displayed temporarily. After that, a character 002SG074 appears holding a lit ignition device, frames in from the bottom right side of the display screen, and then runs to the left, igniting the number display parts 002SG051 of the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 166(H)).

As shown in FIG. 168(A), the specific image 002SG075, which shows a flame displayed by igniting a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 of each symbol, increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 as shown in FIG. 168(B) to (D), and is displayed near the numbers on the number display section 002SG051. Also, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 168(D), the flame image constituting the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in a loop of three images with different aspects (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, specific image 002SG075C), so that the flame appears to be flickering. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 is hidden, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed stationary, and the big win display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 166(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and a result notification display 002SG078 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character (see FIG. 166 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image in the notification performance, a combination of confirmed symbols that is a miss and is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232") is displayed provisionally (see FIG. 166 (L)).

As shown in FIG. 166(M), when the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that has been determined to be a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed temporarily without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the loss display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 166(N)).

In addition, in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to the high base state, after a notification effect is performed to notify that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state (see FIG. 166 (E)), a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, in the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed provisionally (see FIG. 167 (O)).

As shown in FIG. 167(P), when the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 167(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and a result notification display 002SG078 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character (see FIG. 166 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image in the notification performance, a combination of confirmed symbols that is a miss and is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232") is displayed as a provisional stop (see FIG. 167 (R)).

As shown in FIG. 167(S), when the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the combination of symbols that has been determined to be a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed temporarily without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the loss display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 167(T)).

In this way, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern displayed after the notification effect ends, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and adding excitement (see Figures 166 (H) and (I)), while in a high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern displayed after the notification effect ends (see Figure 167 (S)), giving the variable display a sense of speed.

In this embodiment, in a low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in close proximity to the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of decorative symbols that confirms a jackpot, which is displayed after the end of the SP reach performance. However, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame as described above, and an image other than a flame (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied.

The display of a specific image in motion may not only refer to a flickering flame as described above, but may also include the specific image rotating around the numeric display unit 002SG051, or changing in shape or display color.

In addition, in this embodiment, the character 002SG074 acts on each of the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby activating and displaying the specific image 002SG075 around the number display unit 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image may be displayed without the character 002SG074 acting on each of the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modified example of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 169. Fig. 169 shows (A1) to (A7) of the second modified example of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the variable stop action was to enlarge the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 when the decorative pattern was temporarily stopped at the stop position in the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed moving in the opposite direction after passing the stop position in the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R and then returning to the stop position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 169 (A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while decelerating towards the stopping position, and when it reaches the stopping position and is displayed as temporarily stopped (see Figure 169 (A3)), the pedestal display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053 remain displayed as temporarily stopped at the stopping position, while the number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 pass the stopping position and continue to move further downward.

At this time, the distance L2 traveled by the number display unit 002SG051 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped is greater than the distance L1 traveled by the character display unit 002SG052 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped (L1 < L2).

After that, the numeric display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052, which have passed the stop position, each move upward, and the character display unit 002SG052 is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 169 (A5)), while the character display unit 002SG052 moves upward again, passing the stop position (see FIG. 169 (A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when the numeric display unit 002SG051 passes upward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped is smaller than the movement distance L2 from when the numeric display unit 002SG051 passes downward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped (L3 < L2). Finally, the numeric display unit 002SG051 moves downward and is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 169 (A7)).

In addition, in Figure 169 (A6), the action in which only the character display part 002SG052 passes through the stopping position and moves upward is an upward action that is different in form from the fluctuation start action A4 shown in Figure 136 (A), so that the difference from the fluctuation start action can be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stopping position, it is not displayed as temporarily stopped at the moment it reaches the stopping position, but rather at least some of the multiple seed display parts that make up the decorative pattern pass the stopping position and then are displayed as if they move in the opposite direction and return to the stopping position, making it look as if some of the display parts have passed by with momentum, which adds a sense of realism.

In addition, by displaying the first display units (e.g., the pedestal display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053) among the multiple display units as temporarily stopped at the stop position, while the other second display units (e.g., the number display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052) pass through the stop position, it is possible to give movement while ensuring that the stop position is not unclear. Furthermore, by making the movement distances passed by the number display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052 among the second display units different, it is possible to display an action that matches the size and appearance of the display units.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modified example of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 170. Fig. 170 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the third modified example of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, when a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed at a stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first performance mode, as shown in FIG. 134 (A2), the decorative patterns before and after the decorative pattern temporarily displayed at the stop position are not temporarily displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a variable display based on a miss variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 170 (B), when any decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is temporarily displayed at a stop position, a part of the decorative patterns before and after it (e.g., decorative pattern "2", decorative pattern "4") may be temporarily displayed.

When any of the decorative patterns that were variably displayed (for example, the decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see Figs. 170 (A) and (B)), if a variable stop action is performed (see Figs. 170 (C) and (D)), it is preferable that the variable stop action is performed on the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped at the stop position, and that the variable stop action is not performed on the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in an area other than the stop position.

In this way, when a losing combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a losing display result, is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily enlarged to draw the player's attention to the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and even if a losing combination that does not make sense to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept on the area where the decorative symbols are displayed. Also, when the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged, decorative symbols that are not located in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not enlarged, so the player's gaze can be focused on the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the load on the display control can be reduced.

In addition, since loop light emission control continues even when the decorative patterns to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged (see Figures 155 and 156), control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d can be simplified. Note that, if multiple valid stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be executed for the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed at each valid stop position.

(Other Modifications)
In addition, when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode and then develops into an SP reach performance, only the number display unit 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach performance is displayed (for example, the upper left or right side of the display screen) by a specific action including a first predetermined action in which the left and right decorative patterns forming the reach mode move toward the front side of the display screen and a second predetermined action in which the decorative patterns move toward the back side of the display screen, and in this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative patterns is faster in the second predetermined action than in the first predetermined action.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, in a case where the decorative pattern is displayed by the number display section 002SG051 and the information display section 002SG053, the number display section 002SG051 may be able to execute a number variable start action different from the scroll display when the variable display starts, and the information display section 002SG053 may also be able to execute an information display variable start action in conjunction with the number variable start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variable start action may end before the number variable start action ends, and the information display section 002SG053 may be erased.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which either the first or second presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, the third presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and the fourth presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, or three or more types of presentation modes may be executable in a high base state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a first scroll display in the vertical direction is executed in the first presentation mode, a second scroll display that curves and moves from the back side to the front side is executed in the second presentation mode, a rotating display is executed in the third presentation mode, and a third scroll display in the vertical direction is executed in the fourth presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a big win game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state, a probability-varying state, a small win game state, etc. may also be applied as an advantageous state.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to execute a variable display than the normal state and have a shorter average variable display period, are a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state and the special state a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a high probability state (high probability high base state), and an example of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the high probability state when a jackpot game ends is given; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is one of the cases when the variable display result does not match in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after the RAM is cleared (a cold start of the pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game is called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1) is called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state is called time-saving state C.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can be won in the time-saving state C can be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed can be varied depending on the type of variable display result when the time-saving state C is won.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine was used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, and assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A movable body that can move from an initial position to a performance position ;
A performance execution means;
A performance control means;
A movable body control means,
The game control means executes a variable display of the specific identification information,
the performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information;
In one rendering mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed;
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control for operating the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect for encouraging a player to perform an action during a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action promotion performance is notified.
The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a computer-implemented ...
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
When a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of variable display before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and when the movable body is in the initial position , and power is then turned on, it is possible to control the movable body so that the confirmation operation control is performed with the second operation control pattern during execution of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the confirmation operation control is ended before the start of the second part,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display when the power is turned on,
The game control means is capable of performing specific identification information light emission control, which is a control of a plurality of light emitting means that show the result of the variable display of the specific identification information, when the power is turned on;
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be started after the display of the boot preparation display is started,
The confirmation operation control may be started after the specific identification information light emission control is started.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images